all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
USERS MANUAL | Users Manual | 2.65 MiB | / October 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.69 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.06 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 2.53 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.00 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 1.53 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 4.13 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 3.92 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 4.64 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) |
1 2 3 | USERS MANUAL | Users Manual | 2.65 MiB | / October 09 2012 |
C4FM FDMA 144/430 MHz DUAL BAND DIGITAL TRANSCEIVER FT1DR OPERATING MANUAL YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Tennozu Parkside Building 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan YAESU USA 6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A. YAESU UK LTD. Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K. YAESU HK LTD. Unit 1306-1308, 13F., Millennium City 2, 378 Kwun Tong Road, Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Before Reading This Manual Contents Before Reading This Manual ................................... 2 Introduction ................................................................. 4 Features of FT1DR ................................................ 4 How to Read This Manual ...................................... 5 Checking Bundled Items ........................................ 5 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) ....................... 6 Names and Functions of Controls ............................ 12 Basic Operation ...................................................... 15 Preparation ............................................................... 15 Installing the Antenna........................................... 15 Attaching the Supplied Belt Clip/Protective Cap
............................................................................. 15 Attaching the Protective Cap ........................... 15 Installing the Belt Clip ...................................... 15 Attaching a Hand Strap ........................................ 16 How to Use the Battery Case (FBA-39) (Option)
............................................................................. 16 Installing/Removing the Battery Pack .................. 17 Installing the Battery Pack ............................... 17 Removing the Battery Pack ............................. 17 Charging the Battery Pack ................................... 18 Connecting an External Power Supply for Use in Vehicle ................................................................. 20 Connecting to an External Power Supply Using a Power Cable ........................................................ 21 Communication......................................................... 23 Turning on the Power ........................................... 23 Adjusting the Volume Level.................................. 24 Selecting an Operating Band ............................... 25 Selecting a Frequency Band ................................ 27 Tuning in to a Frequency ..................................... 28 Performing Communication ................................. 29 Listening to the Radio ............................................... 30 Listening to an AM or FM Broadcast .................... 30 To deactivate the radio function ...................... 31 To scan through the radio band ....................... 31 Switching between AM Antennas ......................... 31 Miscellaneous Settings ............................................. 32 Setting the Date and Time ................................... 32 Setting the Time Signal ........................................ 33 Muting Audio ........................................................ 33 Changing the Transmission Power Level............. 34 Adjusting the Squelch Level................................. 35 Changing the Frequency Step Manually .............. 35 Changing the Mode Manually .............................. 36 Locking keys or switches ..................................... 37 Restoring to Defaults (All Reset).......................... 37 Repeater Operation ................................................ 38 Repeater Operation .................................................. 38 Communicating Via the Repeater ........................ 38 Using the Memory .................................................. 39 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions ........................ 39 Writing into the Memory ....................................... 40 Split Memory ........................................................ 41 Recalling a Memory Channel ............................... 41 Recalling the Home Channel ............................... 42 Returning to the Previous Frequency .............. 42 Deleting the Memory Channel ............................. 42 Restoring the Deleted Memory Channel ......... 43 Using Memory Banks ............................................... 43 Registering a Memory Channel in a Memory Bank ..................................................................... 44 Recalling a Memory Bank .................................... 44 Canceling Memory Channel Registration in a Memory Bank ...................................................... 45 Convenient Special Banks ....................................... 45 Registering Your Favorite Special Memory Channels in a Memory Bank ................................ 45 Recalling a Special Bank to Listen to the JR Railway Radio ...................................................... 46 Recalling a Special Bank to Listen to the International VHF (Marine) Radio ........................ 46 Scanning Function ................................................. 48 Using the Scanning Function.................................... 48 VFO Scan ............................................................ 48 Canceling Scanning ........................................ 49 Skipping a Frequency You Do Not Want Scan
(Skip Search Memory) .................................... 49 Specifying the Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan ................................................................ 50 Deleting a Frequency Saved in the Skip Search Memory ........................................................... 50 Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops ............................................................... 51 Memory Scanning ................................................ 51 Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel
........................................................................ 53 Scanning Only the Selected Memory Channel ........................................................... 54 Scanning a Memory Bank .................................... 54 Memory Bank Link Scan ................................. 55 Programmable Memory Scan (PMS) ................... 56 Writing into a Programmable Memory ............. 56 Performing Programmable Memory Scan ....... 56 Using the Search Function ....................................... 57 Spectrum Scope Searching for a Signal Using a Signal Strength Graph ....................... 57 Using the GPS Function ........................................ 58 What is GPS? ........................................................... 58 Activating the GPS Function..................................... 58 Method of Positioning by GPS.................................. 59 Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation .............. 61 BACK TRACK Function ............................................ 62 Causing the FT1DR to Memorize the Current Point ..................................................................... 62 Using the BACK TRACK Function ....................... 63 Description of the BACK TRACK Function Screen
............................................................................. 63 B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 2 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Useful Functions .................................................... 64 Dual Reception (DW) Functions ............................... 64 Dial Dual Reception VFO mode Priority memory channel ........................ 64 Memory Dual Reception Memory channel Priority memory channel ................ 65 Home Channel Dual Reception Home channel Priority memory channel .................. 65 Using the DTMF Function......................................... 66 Confirming the Entered DTMF Code by the Sound .............................................................. 67 Sending the Registered DTMF Code ................... 67 Sending a DTMF Code Manually ......................... 68 Communicating with a Specific Remote Station
.................................................................................. 69 Using the Tone Squelch Function ............................. 69 Selecting a Tone Frequency ............................ 70 Selecting a DCS Code .................................... 71 Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station ..................................... 72 Notification of Call from the Remote Station by Vibration of the Vibrator ....................................... 73 Selecting a Vibrator Operation Mode .............. 73 Notification of Call from a Remote Station by the Bell Bell Function ................................................. 74 Changing the Number of Times the Bell Rings ............................................................... 75 Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function ............................................................... 75 Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function
........................................................................ 76 Setting the Code of Your Station ..................... 76 Turning on the New Pager Function ................ 77 Calling a Specific Station ................................ 77 Being Called by the Remote Station
(Standby Operation) ........................................ 78 Functions Used As Needed ................................... 79 Set Mode .................................................................. 79 Selecting Set Mode Items .................................... 79 Resetting the Set Mode Items ......................... 79 Set Mode Item List .............................................. 80 FT1DR Specifications............................................. 87 Contents B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 3 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Introduction Features of FT1DR Digital communication (C4FM (Quaternary FSK), FDMA system) ........................... 000 External power supply terminal ................................................................................ 000 Reception on two different bands + Reception on two identical bands (V+V/U+U) . 000 Independent switching keys for A-band and B-band and TX/BUSY display ............ 000 Wide-band reception over the range of 500 kHz to 999.900 MHz ........................... 000 Waterproofing design 20 conforming to IPX5, which protects the FT1DR from rain and splashes ..................................................................................................... 000 Independent side keys, a full keyboard for easy entry of data, and a tilted main dial. .............................................................................................. 000 Easy-to-see dot matrix display ................................................................................. 000 Ready for WiRES-II and WiRES-X connection (realized by the incorporated 64-channel WiRES-II access memory) .............................................Refer to CD-ROM. Large-capacity 1327 ch memory and twenty-four 100 ch memory banks ............... 000 Display of a memory tag comprising up to 16 one-byte characters ......................... 000 Special banks for easy reception ............................................................................. 000 Just by selecting preset frequencies, you can receive AM/FM, shortwave broadcast, international VHF radios with ease. ........................................................................ 000 A wide variety of scan functions ............................................................................... 000 Built-in GPS unit allowing display of your current location and heading information ................................................................................................. 000 Ready for APRS communication through use of world standard 1200/ 9600bps AX25 modem (B-band only) ........................................... See CD-ROM. High-resolution spectrum scope function for 50 channels .................................... 000 A variety of individual calling functions such as tone squelch (CTCSS) and DCS functions .................................................................................................................. 000 Vibrator for informing you of signal reception in addition to the bell ....................... 000 New pager function for calling only specific stations ................................................ 000 Illumination by white LED for easy viewing of the LCD outdoors ............................ 000 Built-in temperature sensor ...................................................................................... 000 Battery save function for prolonging the operating time of the battery ..................... 000 Data terminal for data communication with external equipment or firmware update ....................................................................................................... 000 Build-in bar antenna for AM reception ..................................................................... 000 Ready for micro SD ................................................................................................. 000 Snapshot function (an optional camera microphone MH-85A11U is required)
................................................................................................................ See CD-ROM. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 4 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Introduction How to Read This Manual Typical explanatory expressions used in this manual are as follows:
Press the B key briefly. Press and hold the B key for over 1 second. FB... (Press the F key, and then press the B key.) While pressing the v key, turn the O knob. Precaution Hint
...Explains notes to follow during operation. ..Explains operating suggestions or useful hints. Checking Bundled Items Main unit Antenna Battery pack (FNB-101LI) B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i Battery charger (PA-48) Belt clip Protective plate for battery pack Operating Instruction
(this manual) Warranty Notes z Make sure that the name of the shop from which you purchased the product and the date of purchase are indicated on the warranty card. z If any item is missing, contact the shop from which you purchased the product. l 5 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Be sure to read the safety precautions to use this product safely. We are not liable for failures and other problems caused due to misuse or use of this product by you or a third party as well as the damages caused through use of this product by you or a third party except in the case where we are ordered to pay for damages under the laws. Types and Meanings of Symbols DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or only property damage. Types and Meanings of Legends Indicates a prohibited item not to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, indicates that the product should not be disassembled. Indicates an obliged item to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, indicates that the power plug should be removed. DANGER Do not use this product in an area where use of it is prohibited, e.g., inside the hospital, airplane, or train. This product can affect electronic or medical devices. Do not use this product while riding a bicycle or driving a car. Accidents can result. Be sure to stop the bicycle or car at a safe place before using this product. Those who are carrying a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker should not perform transmission near it. When performing transmission, use an external antenna and keep away from the external antenna as far as possible. The radio wave emitted from this product can cause the medical device to malfunction and result in an accident. Do not use this product or the battery charger in a place where inflammable gas is generated. A fire or explosion can occur. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 6 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Do not perform transmission in a crowded place for the safety of the persons carrying a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker. The radio wave emitted from this product can cause the medical device to malfunction and result in an accident. Do not touch the liquid leaking from the battery pack with bare hands. The liquid that has stuck to your skin or entered in your eye can cause chemical burn. In such a case, consult the doctor immediately. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Do not solder or short-circuit the terminal of the battery pack. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. Do not carry the battery pack together with a necklace or hair pin. A short circuit can result. If it starts thundering when the external antenna is used, immediately turn off this product and disconnect the external antenna from it. A fire, electrical shock, failure can result. WANING B e f Do not use this product at a voltage other than the specified power supply voltage. A fire or electric shock can result. Do not use the battery pack for any model other than the specified mode. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. This product has a waterproof structure and conforms to IPX5 when the included antenna and battery pack are installed and rubber caps are securely attached to the MIC/SP jack, EXTDC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot. If this product gets wet, wipe it with a dry cloth, etc. without leaving it as it is. Leaving this product in a wet condition can degrade its performance, shorten its life, or cause a failure or electrical shock. Do not perform transmission for a long period. The main body can overheat, resulting in a failure or burn. Do not disassemble or make any alteration to this product. An injury, electric shock, or failure can result. Do not handle the battery pack or charger with wet hands. Do not insert or remove the power plug with wet hands. An injury, leak, fire, or failure can result. If smoke or strange odor is emitted from the main body, battery pack, or battery charger, immediately turn off this product, remove the battery pack, and remove the power plug from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, damage, ignition, or failure can result. Contact the shop from which you purchased this product or our Amateur Customer Support. Do not use the battery pack which is externally damaged or deformed. A fire, leak, hating, explosion, or ignition can result. Do not use any battery charger which is not specified by us. A fire or failure can result. Keep the terminals of the battery pack clean. If stained, a fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 7 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) If charging of the battery pack cannot be completed after lapse of the specified time, immediately remove the power plug of the battery charger from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. CAUTION Do not dangle or throw this product by holding its antenna. This product can hit and injure someone. In addition, doing so can result in a main body failure or damage. Do not use this product in a crowded place. The antenna can hit someone, resulting in a injury. Do not place this product in a place subject to direct sunlight or near a heater. This product can deform or discolor. Do not place this product in a humid or dusty place. A fire or failure can result. During transmission, keep the antenna away from you as far as possible. Long-time exposure to electromagnetic waves can have a negative impact on your health. Do not clean the case with thinner or benzene. Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the case. If you do not use this product for a long period, turn it off and remove the battery pack for safety. Do not give a strong shock to or throw this product. A failure can result. Keep magnetic cards and video tape away from this product. The data recorded on cash cards or video tape can be erased. Do not use the earpiece microphone, earphones, or headphones at an extremely high volume level. Hearing impairment can result. Keep this product out of reach of children. An injury, etc. can result. Install the hand strap and belt click securely. If they are installed improperly, they can fall down, resulting in an injury or damage. Do not place a heavy thing on the power cord of the battery charger. The battery cord can be damaged, resulting in a fire or electric shock. Do not use the included battery charger to charge any battery pack which is not specified by us. A fire can result. Do not perform transmission near the TV or radio. Radio disturbance can occur in this product, TV, or radio. Do not use any products other than the options specified by us. A failure can result. When the battery charger is not in use, remove its power plug from the outlet B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 8 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Charge the battery pack within the temperature range from 5C to 35C. Charging the battery pack outside this temperature range can cause leak, overheating, decrease in performance, or reduction in service life can result. When unplugging the power cord of the battery charger, be sure to hold the power plug. Pulling the power cord can damage it and cause a fire or electronic shock. Before discarding the worn battery pack, affix tape or the like to its terminals. When using this product in a hybrid or fuel-saving car, be sure to check with the automobile manufacturer if the it can be used in that car. Noise generated by an onboard electrical device (inverter, etc.) can disable normal reception by this product. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 9 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) About Waterproo ng Feature Conforming to IPX5 When the included antenna and battery pack are installed and the MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot are securely covered with rubber caps, this product can withstand continuous 30-minute immersion in water at depth of 1 m. To ensure this waterproofing feature, be sure to check the following points before use. Check for damages, deterioration, and dirt. Antenna rubber, key switch rubber, MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, micro SD slot rubber cap, and battery pack joint. Cleaning When this product is contaminated with seawater, sand, or dirt, rinse with fresh water, and then wipe with a dry cloth immediately. Recommended maintenance interval It is recommended that you ask for maintenance of this product when one year has passed since purchase or previous maintenance or when any damage or deterioration is found. Note that the maintenance service is subject to fees. Do not immerse this product in the following liquids:
Sea, pool, hot spring, water containing soap, detergent, or bath additive, alcohol, or chemicals Do not leave this product for a long time in the following places:
Bathroom, kitchen, or humid place Other precautions Since this product is not totally waterproof, it cannot be used in water. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 10 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Before Transmitting Radio Waves If you are informed that the radio waves emitted from your amateur station are interfering with reception by the TV, radio, etc., of a neighbor, you should stop emitting the radio waves and check whether any problem of interference and its degree if it exists. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 11 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Names and Operation of Controls Names and Functions of Controls a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t a Antenna terminal (SMA)*
b Flashlight (White LED) This LED can be used as a small flashlight in a dark place. c A-band BUSY/TX lamp B-band BUSY/TX lamp These lamps glow green during reception, and glow red during transmission. d pPTT switch Press and hold the p switch during transmission. e Tswitch Press and hold the T switch to deactivate the squelch function. While pressing the F key and T switch, turn the O knob to adjust the squelch level. f v switch While pressing the v key, turn the O knob to adjust the volume level. g P switch Press and hold the P switch over 1 second to turn on the FT-D1. Press and hold the P switch over 1 second again to turn off the FT-D1. Press the P switch briefly to lock keys. h Akey (switching between operating bands) Pressing the A key briefly toggles between A-band and B-band. Press and hold the A key over 1 second to change the Dual Band Reception mode to the Mono Band Reception mode. While operating the FT-D1 in the Mono Band Reception mode, press the F key and then press the A key briefly to enlarge the display. i M key Pressing the M key switches among display modes (frequency APRS and GPS). Press the hold the M key over 1 second to call the Set mode. j Battery pack*
k O knob Turn this knob to change frequencies or select a memory channel. l GPS antenna m MIC/SP jack*
Connect a speaker microphone or earpiece microphone to this jack. It is not waterproofed when an external microphone is connected. Do not connect any product which is not specified by us. A failure can result. n EXT DC IN jack*
Connect an external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (E-DC-5B) or an external power cable (E-DC-6) to this jack. When charging the battery pack, connect the battery charger (PA-48) to this jack. Do not connect any product which is not specified by us. A failure can result. o DATA terminal*
Use this terminal when using a clone function or updating the firmware. Connect the optional camera-equipped microphone (MH-85A11U). For how to update the firmware, access our home page. p Microphone q Display This LCD displays reception frequencies and various settings. r Speaker s 15 keys These keys are used to specify reception/
transmission frequencies and select functions. t F switch Press the F key briefly to activate function keys. Press and hold the F key over 1 second to write a frequency in the memory.
* When the included antenna and battery pack are installed and the MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot are securely covered with rubber caps, the FT-D1 can deliver the waterproofing performance conforming to IPX5 (See page 10). B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l 12 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Names and Functions of Controls When pressed briefly Key When entering a frequency or calling a When inputting a tag When pressed and held over 1 second memory CH
% Switches between radio wave types. Moves the cursor to the left. Selects SD card data. When a key is pressed after the F switch is pressed Sends the selected SD card data. X Turns on/off the WiRES-X function. D Turns on/off the GSM function. Manipulates member data. 1 Number 1 Number 1 2 Number 2 3 Number 3 4 Number 4 5 Number 5 6 Number 6 7 Number 7 8 Number 8 9 Number 9 0 Number 0 Number 2 or letter A, B, C, a, b, or c Number 3 or letter D, E, or F, d, e, or f Number 4 or letter G, H, or I , g, h, or i Number 5 or letter J, K, or L, j, k, or l Number 6 or letter M, N, or O, m, n, or o Number 7 or letter P, Q, R, or S, p, q, r, or s Number 8 or letter T, U, or V, t, u, or v Number 9 or letter W, X, Y, or Z, w, x, y, or z Number 0 Switches between transmission power levels. Selects the spectrum cope function. Selects the special bank function. Selects the home channel. Selects a reversal function. Selects the AF DUAL function. B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i Displays a station list. l Displays a digital list. Selects a beacon text. Receives the AM/FM radio band. B Increases the frequency. Moves the cursor to the right. Selects the scan function. Decreases the frequency. V Switches between the VFO mode and Memory mode. Switches between letter types. Selects the dual watch function. 13 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Names and Functions of Controls a b c d e f g
h i g h i A-band display area
B-band display area
Icon display area a b c d e f a Displays choice of the VFO mode or MR
(memory) mode. b Displays a sound volume bar graph. c Displays a transmission power level icon. d Displays an operating frequency. e S meter: Displays the radio wave strength in 9 steps. PO meter: Displays the transmission power level in 4 steps. H I: High power (5 W) L 3: LOW 3 power (2.5 W) L 2: LOW 2 power (1 W) L 1: LOW 1 power (0.05 W) f Displays the operating mode (radio wave type). B e f i o r e R e a d n g T h s M a n u a i l Icons Description Icon f Lights when a function key is pressed. i Stays lit during internet communication such as WiRES (See page 31). d Stays lit when the DTMF function is active (See page 36, 130).
[ Stays lit when the APO function is active (See page 150). l Stays lit when the LOCK function is active (See page 29).
<
] Stays lit when the MUTE function is active (See page 27). s Stays lit when a micro SD memory card is inserted. 14 g Displays a squelch type (See page 136). TN: Stays lit when the tone encoder function is active. TSQ: Stays lit when the tone squelch function is active. DCS: Stays lit when the DCS function is active. RTN: Stays lit when the reverse tone function is active. PAG: Stays lit when the pager is active. MSG: Stays on when the message function is active. Displays the APRS baud rate (See page 71). h Displays a shift direction during repeater operation. (See page 30)
-Minus shift
+Plus shift
@Split operation b is displayed when the bell alarm function is active (See page 140). i Displayed when the vibrator function is active. Solid line ():
BUSY vibrator function (See page 139) Dashed line:
SIGNALING vibrator function (See page 139) Short dashed line (----):
APRS MSG vibrator function (See page 96) Icon Description H I Displays the transmission power level
(See page 27). H I: High power (5W) L 3: LOW 3 power (2.5W) L 2: LOW 2 power (1W) L 1: LOW 1 power (0.05W) Displays the battery charge level.
< : Enough battery power
> : Low battery power
? : Poor battery power. _ : Charge battery. _ : Charge battery immediately
(blink). FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Basic Operation Basic Operation Preparation Installing the Antenna 1 Align the antenna with the antenna terminal on the main unit. Note Be sure to hold the thick root of the antenna when installing it. 2 Turn the antenna clockwise until it is secured. Precaution z Do not hold the upper part of the antenna when installing or removing it. Breaking of wire can occur inside the antenna. z Do not transmit without installing the antenna. The transmitter circuit can be damaged. z When using an detachable antenna other than the supplied one or any other external antenna, ensure that its SWR is adjusted to 1.5 or lower. Attaching the Supplied Belt Clip/Protective Cap Attaching the Protective Cap 1 Attaching the Protective Cap If you do not use the belt clip, attach the protective cap to the belt clip attaching opening. Installing the Belt Clip 1 Turn over the battery pack. 2 Install the belt clip using the supplied screws (two). Precaution z Be sure to use the supplied screws when installing the belt clip. Using any other screws can result in injury, damage to parts, and other troubles. z Be sure to install the protective cap when the belt clip is not used. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 15 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Attaching a Hand Strap If you attach a hand strap to the FT1DR, its string which is inserted in and secured to the strap hole in the transceiver must have a diameter of 1 mm.
* The hand strap does not come with the FT1DR. 1 Remove the battery pack. 2 Attach the hand strap. Precaution Use a hand strap which can stand the weight of the FT1DR. If you use a hand strap which is not strong enough, the hand strap can break and the FT1DR can fall down, resulting in injury, damage to parts, and other troubles. How to Use the Battery Case (FBA-39) (Option) The optional battery case (FBA-39) allows three AA Alkaline batteries to be used as a power supply. Hint When the battery case (FBA-39) is used, you can select a power output level from:
Low Power (L1): 0.05 W Low Power (L2): 1W Note that Low Power (L3) and High Power are not available. 1 Open the cover. Lift up the lower right corner indicated by the hand pointer in the illustration. 2 Put alkaline batteries in the battery case. Note Use three alkaline batteries. Pay attention to polarities (+ and ) of the alkaline batteries. 3 Close the cover. Push hard four corners of the cover to close it tightly. Hint When the batteries become weak, _ is displayed on the LCD. When the batteries become far weaker, _ blinks on the LCD. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 16 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Precaution z Manganese batteries cannot be used. Rechargeable AA batteries cannot be used, either. z Do not use new batteries along with old batteries. The life of new batteries can decrease. z If you do not use the FT1DR for a long period, remove the batteries from the battery case. z If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the FT1DR can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or explosion. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Installing/Removing the Battery Pack Installing the Battery Pack 1 Insert the bottom tabs of the battery in the slots at the bottom of the FT1DR. Lock knobs 2 Push in the lock knobs until they click. Precaution When you use the FT1DR for the first time after purchase or you have not used it for a long period, charge the battery pack before use. Removing the Battery Pack 1 While pushing down the lock knobs, remove the battery pack. Push down the lock knobs in the direction of the arrow. Push down the lock knobs in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration. Precaution When releasing the lock knobs, be careful not to hurt your fingers and nails. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 17 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Charging the Battery Pack Precaution z The battery pack is rechargeable about 300 times. However, improper use such as overcharge or over-discharge can shorten its life. z The battery pack is a consumable item. Recharging the battery pack repeatedly will gradually shorten the time until its power becomes low. z If the FT1DR is not used for a long period with the battery pack installed, deterioration of the battery pack can accelerate. z If you do not use the FT1DR for a long period, be sure to store it with the battery pack removed. Even if you do not use the FT1DR for a long period, install the battery pack biannually and recharge the battery pack about 50%. z Storing the battery pack in a high-temperature place can deteriorate it faster than usual. Store the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is 20C to +50C. z Do not drop or give a strong shock to the battery pack. It can break. Hints The battery pack contains lithium-ion batteries that can be recharged for repetitive use. The FT1DR can be used with either of the following battery packs:
(1) Accessory: FNB-101L (I 7.4 V, 1100 mAh)
(2) Option: FNB-102L (I 7.4 V, 1800 mAh) When the battery pack is recharged, its output voltage (about 8 V) becomes higher than the specified value (7.4 V). This is not a failure. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 100 - 120 VAC Battery charger PA-48
(accessory) Grooves in battery pack Rails Quick-charge cradle CD-41
(option) 18 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Install the battery pack. 1 2 Turn off the FT1DR. 3 Insert the plug of the battery charger (PA-48A) in the EXT DC IN jack of the FT1DR. Charging starts. The lamp glows red and CHARGING is displayed on the LCD. The charge level is indicated by a bar graph. It takes about 5 hours to charge the battery pack fully. Preparation CHARGING When charging is completed, COMPLETE is COMPLETED displayed on the LCD and the lamp glows green. Supplement It takes about 8 hours to charge the FNB-102LI
(option). The optional quick-charge cradle (CD-41) requires about 2.5 hours to charge the supplied battery pack (about 4 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-102LI). Place the FT1DR on the cradle with the rails of the cradle fit in the grooves in the battery pack. When charging the battery pack using the cradle, the LED on the cradle indicate the state of charging. During charging: Red glow Fast blink Slow blink Completion of charging: Green glow i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 4 Remove the plug of the battery charger from the jack of the FT1DR. Precaution z Neither transmission nor reception can be performed while charging the battery pack using the supplied battery charger. z During charging, noise may be generated in the nearby TV or radio. Charge the battery pack with the battery charger away from the TV or radio as far as possible. z If BATTERY NOT INSTALLED is displayed on the LCD and the battery pack cannot be charged after lapse of 11 or more hours, stop charging the battery pack immediately. If the same message is displayed again, the battery pack is presumably at the end of its life or defective. If so, replace the battery pack with a new one. z While charging the battery pack, protect the FT1DR from splash of water. z Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5C to +35C. z If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the FT1DR can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or explosion. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Hints The battery charger may become hot during charging. This is not a failure. If _ flashes, the battery pack charge is depleted. Charge it immediately. 19 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Approximate Operating Hours and Remaining Charge Level Indication Approximate hours during which the fully charged battery pack or three new AA alkaline batteries can operate the FT1DR are as follows:
Band Battery pack Battery pack FNB-101LI FNB-102LI Batter case FBA-39 144 MHz Approx. 5.0 Approx. 8.5 Approx. 17 band hours hours hours Amateur radio band 430 MHz Approx. 5.0 Approx.8.0 Approx.16 band hours hours hours Icon
< : Full battery power
> : Enough battery power
? : Low battery power _ : Poor battery power Charge battery. _ : Charge battery immediately.
(Blink) Remarks Approximate hours are estimated assuming that the FT1DR is operated under the following conditions. Hours during which the FT1DR can be used actually vary depending on use conditions, ambient temperature, etc. The GPS function is deactivated. With an amateur radio band selected, a sequence in which high-power transmission is performed for 6 seconds, reception is performed for 6 seconds, and the standby operation is performed for 48 seconds is repeated. Connecting an External Power Supply for Use in Vehicle i B a s c O p e r a t i o n The optional external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (E-DC-5B) allows the FT1DR to be used in a vehicle. 1 Turn off the FT1DR. 2 Insert the plug of the external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (E-DC-
5B) in the EXT DC IN jack of the FT1DR. 3 Insert the cigarette lighter plug of the external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (E-DC-5B) in the cigarette lighter socket of the vehicle. To cigarette lighter socket of vehicle EXT DC IN jack External power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug E-DC-5B (option) 20 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Precaution z The E-DC-5B is compatible with a 12 VDC cigarette lighter socket. Do not connect the E-DC-5B to the 24 VDC cigarette lighter socket. z Use the FT1DR at the minimum required transmission power level to prevent overheating. z Do not perform continuous transmission for a prolonged period. The FT1DR can overheat, resulting in a failure or burn. z If you operate the FT1DR for 7 hours or longer, it is recommended that you remove the battery pack and install the optional battery case (FBA-39). z Recharging the fully-charged battery pack repeatedly can shorten its life. Be extremely careful not to do so when you operate the FT1DR using an external power supply. z While charging the battery pack, protect the FT1DR from splash of water. z Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5C to +35C. z If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the FT1DR can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or rupture. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Hints The external power supply requires about 5 hours to charge the battery pack (about 8 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-102LI). If the battery pack is charged with the FT1DR powered, the charging time increases slightly. When the battery pack has been charged fully, charging stops automatically. The external power supply can be used with the battery case installed. If you connect the FT1DR to the extern al power supply with it turned off, CONNECTED TO EXTERNAL POWER is displayed on the LCD, and about 20 seconds later BATTERY NOT INSTALLED is displayed. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n Connecting to an External Power Supply Using a Power Cable The optional power cable (E-DC-6) allows the FT1DR to be connected to an external power supply. 1 Turn off the FT1DR. 2 Connect the optional external power supply cable (E-DC-6) to an external power supply. Remarks Connect the red/black wire or white/
Connect the external antenna. External power supply black wire to the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply, and connect the black wire to the negative () terminal. Set the voltage of the external power supply to 12-14 V. 3 Insert the plug of the external power supply in the EXT DC IN jack of the FT1DR. External power supply cable E-DC-6 (option) 21 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Preparation Precautions z When you use the FT1DR with the external power supply cable (E-DC-6) connected to an external power supply, pay attention to the following:
The power supply voltage must be 12 V to 14 V. If the voltage exceeds 14 V, the high voltage protection function is activated to disable high-power transmission. L3 (2.5 W) is selected automatically to reduce the transmission power. If the voltage exceeds 16 V, failures such as damage to the electric circuits of the FT1DR can result. Take extra care. Connect the red/black wire or white/black wire of the external power supply cable (E-DC-6) to the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply, and connect the black wire to the negative () terminal. Use an external power supply having sufficient current capacity (3 A or more). If the supplied antenna remains installed, the external power supply can malfunction, resulting in a failure. If you use an external power supply, remove the supplied antenna and connect an external antenna. Place the external power supply sufficiently away from the FT1DR. z Use the FT1DR at the minimum required transmission power level to prevent overheating. z Do not continue transmission for a prolonged period. The FT1DR can overheat, resulting in a failure or burn. z If you operate the FT1DR for 7 hours or longer, it is recommended that you remove the battery pack and install the optional battery case (FBA-39). z Recharging the fully-charged battery pack repeatedly can shorten its life. Be extremely careful not to do so when you operate the FT1DR using an external power supply. z While charging the battery pack, protect the FT1DR from splash of water. z Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5C to +35C. z If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the FT1DR can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or explosion. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n Hints The external power supply requires about 5 hours to charge the battery pack (about 8 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-102LI). If the battery pack is charged with the FT1DR powered, the charging time increases slightly. The external power supply can be used with the battery case installed. In this case, BATTERY NOT INSTALLED is displayed on the LCD of the FT1DR; however, the FT1DR can be used, without any problem, with the battery case installed. If you connect the FT1DR to the external power supply with it turned off, CONNECTED TO EXTERNAL POWER is displayed on the LCD, and about 20 seconds later BATTERY NOT INSTALLED is displayed. 22 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Lets try communication using the FT1DR in the analog communication mode. Follow the procedure below. Turn the power on. Adjust the volume level. Select an operating band. Select a frequency (band). Tune in to a frequency. Start communication. Turning on the Power 1 Press and hold the P switch over 1 second. An opening message is displayed, and then two frequencies (A-band frequency and B-band frequency) are displayed at the same time. Hints You can change the information such as the power supply voltage and the opening message displayed at power-on. Press and hold the M key over 1 second to select the Set mode, and then select 1 DISPLAY 7 OPENING MESSAGE. In addition, you can cause the FT1DR to display the reception frequency immediately without displaying the opening message (See page 154). O Turning off the Power To turn off the power, press and hold the P switch over 1 second. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 23 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Adjusting the Volume Level The FT1DR allows the volume level to be adjusted for the A-band and B-band separately. 1 Press the A key to select a band for which you want to adjust the volume level. Pressing the A key toggles between the A-band and B-band. 2 While pressing the v key, turn the O knob to adjust the volume level. The volume bar graph moves up/down while blinking. Supplement If no sound is heard from the speaker, press the T key and then adjust the volume level while listening to white noise. 3 Release the v key. The Volume Level Adjustment mode is canceled. Volume bar graph blinks. One of SP VOLUME 0 to SP VOLUME 32 is displayed. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 24 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Selecting an Operating Band The frequency displayed on the LCD in large letters is called an operating band. Each operating band allows you change the frequency and perform transmission. Communication Pressing the A key briefly toggles between the information for A-band and the information for B-band. A-band (operating band) B-band Press and hold the A key for about 1 second. Press the A key briefly. Press and hold the A key for about 1 second. Press the F key briefly. Press the A key briefly. Press the A key briefly. Press the F key briefly. Press the A key briefly. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 25 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Hints The A-band allows you to perform communication using the following amateur radio bands. 144 MHz band, 430 MHz band The A-band also allows you to perform reception using the following radio bands:
AIR band, INFO band (1), INFO band (2) The B-band allows you to perform communication using the following amateur radio bands. 144 MHz band, 430 MHz band The B-band also allows you to perform reception using the following radio bands:
AIR band, INFO band (1) The number (1-9) corresponding to the selected frequency band is displayed on the LCD. For the relationship between the numbers and frequency bands, see the following table:
Reception frequencies of A-band and B-band Frequency band No. A-band B-band
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) 1.8 MHz to 30 MHz
(SW band) 30 MHz to 76 MHz
(50 MHz band) 108 MHz to 137 MHz 108MHz to 137MHz
(AIR band)
(AIR band) 137 MHz to 174 MHz 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band)
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz 174 MHz to 222 MHz 222 MHz to 420 MHz 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(INFO band (1))
(INFO band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band)
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 770 MHz 470 MHz to 770 MHz 770 MHz to 999 MHz
(INFO band (2)) The A-band and B-band can be received at the same time. You can receive an amateur radio frequency while listening to the AIR band, or receive two amateur radio frequencies on the same frequency band at the same time (V+V/U+U: Dual frequency reception on the same band). The sub-band operation function allows you to change the sub-band to the operating band during dual reception (See page 29). i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 26 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Selecting a Frequency Band The FT1DR allows you to select a frequency band for the A-band and a frequency band for the B-band separately. Communication O Setting a Frequency Band for the A-band 1 Press the A key. Select the A-band. 2 Press the B key briefly. Select a frequency band. SW band (1) 50 MHband (2) AIR band (3) 144 MHz band (4) 174 MHz to 222 MHz (5) INFO band (2) (9) 470 MHz to 770 MHz (8) 430 MHz band (7) INFO band (1) (6) Hint Pressing the F key briefly and then pressing the B briefly changes frequency bands in the reverse order. O Selecting a Frequency Band for the B-band 1 Press the A key. Select the B-band. 2 Press the B key briefly. Select a frequency band. AIR band (3) 144 MHz band (4) 174 MHz to 222 MHz band (5) 470 MHz to 770 MHz (8) 430 MHz band (7) INFO band (1) (6) Hint Pressing the F key briefly and then pressing the B briefly changes frequency bands in the reverse order. Precaution z Digital communication can be performed only on the A-band. Digital communication cannot be performed on the B-band. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 27 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Hints The number (one of 1-9) corresponding to the selected frequency band is displayed on the LCD. For the relationship between the numbers and the frequency bands, see the table shown on page 23. By default, the following frequencies are set. A-band: 145.000 MHz B-band: 433.000MHz By default, the Auto mode is selected such that it is switched to the mode ideal for the selected frequency band. You can change modes by pressing and holding the M key over 1 second and then selecting 2 TX/RX 1 MODE 5RX MODE (See page 29). For the relationship between frequency bands and reception frequencies, see the table on page 11. Pressing the F key and then pressing the 4 key allows you to call the home channel of each frequency band (See page 40). Tuning in to a Frequency i B a s c O p e r a t i o n Tune in to your desired frequency using either of the following methods:
(1) Turn the O knob to tune in to your desired frequency.
(2) Enter a frequency directly using numeric keys. O Turning the O knob to Tune in to a Desired Frequency 1 Select the VFO mode. 2 Turn the O knob to tune in to your desired frequency. Clockwise turn: The frequency increases. Counterclockwise turn: The frequency decreases. Hints Pressing the F key briefly and turning the O knob allows you to set frequencies in steps of 1 MHz. O Entering a Desired Frequency Directly Using Numeric Keys 1 Press the V key. 2 Enter your desired frequency using numeric keys. Example: To enter 145.520 MHz, press the following The VOF mode is selected, allowing you to select a frequency. keys:
14552 Example: To enter 430.000 MHz, press the following keys:
43V 28 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Hints By default, the Auto Step mode is selected such that the frequency step ideal for the reception frequency is automatically selected. You can change frequency steps manually using the O knob (See page 28). If you enter a wrong digit when entering a frequency using numeric keys, you can cancel it by pressing the p switch. By default, turning the O knob beyond the selected frequency band causes the FT1DR to change the selected frequency band to another frequency band. To prevent this, press and hold the M key over 1 second to select the Set mode and then select 7 CONFIG 22 VFO MODE BAND. The FT1DR can display frequencies on the same frequency band repeatedly even if you turn the O knob beyond the selected frequency band. Performing Communication 1 While pressing the p switch, speak into the microphone. When speaking into the microphone, keep it about 5 cm away from your mouth. 2 Release the p switch. The FT1DR returns to the Receive mode. Precaution z Use the FT1DR at the minimum required transmission power level. Doing so prevents the FT1DR from overheating and saves battery power, increasing the operating time. z Do not continue transmission for a prolonged period. The FT1DR can overheat, resulting in a failure or burn. z If transmission is continued for a long period, the FT1DR overheats and the overheat protection function is activated, As a result, Low Power is automatically selected as the power output level. If transmission is continued with the overheat protection function held active, the FT1DR is forcibly returned to the Receive mode. If you touch the FT1DR immediately after the overheat protection function has become active, you can get burnt. Wait for the temperature inside the FT1DR to drop sufficiently before resuming transmission. z Do not perform transmission without installing the antenna. The transmitter circuit can be damaged. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 29 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communication Hints In the NFM mode, you can transmit on the 144 MHz band or the 430 MHz amateur bands. Even when you are performing reception in the AM mode, pressing the p switch allows you to perform transmission in the NFM mode. Pressing the F key and the pressing the 1 key allows you to change the transmission power level. Pressing the F key displays f on the LCD. Pressing the X key toggles between transmission power levels. The icon corresponding to the transmission power level and a PO meter are displayed on the LCD. The current power level is displayed, for about 2 seconds, in the area where a frequency is displayed. Transmission power is different between the battery pack and the battery case. For more details, see Changing the Transmission Power Level on page 27. If the p switch is pressed when a band other than the amateur radio band is selected, an alarm tone (beep) is issued and ERROR is displayed on the LCD, disabling transmission. Pressing the M key over 1 second to change the Set mode allows you to use the FT1DR more conveniently. Selecting 7 CONFIG 2 BCLO prohibits transmission during reception of a signal. Listening to the Radio Listening to an AM or FM Broadcast The FT1DR allows you to receive AM (medium wave band) and FM broadcasts on the A-band. The FT1DR incorporates an antenna dedicated to the AM broadcast (medium wave band). Turn around the FT1DR body to adjust the AM broadcast
(medium wave band) receiving sensitivity. The FM broadcast is received via the supplied antenna installed at the top of the FD-D1. 1 Press the A key. Select the A-band as an operating band. 2 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 0 key. 3 Press the B key. Pressing the B key toggles between AM and FM The Radio Function mode is selected. broadcasts. AM broadcast (middle wave band) (A) FM broadcast (F) During reception of the AM broadcast (middle wave band),
(A) is displayed on the LCD. During reception of the FM broadcast, (F) is displayed on the LCD. 4 Turn the O knob to tune in to your desired frequency. Tune in to the frequency of your desired broadcast station. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 30 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Listening to the Radio To deactivate the radio function 1 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 0 key. The Radio Function mode is canceled. To scan through the radio band 1 Select the A-band as an operating band. Press and hold the B key over 1 second. If a signal is received during scanning, a beep sound is issued and scanning stops to receive the broadcast corresponding to the received signal. Five seconds later, scanning will resume. While the broadcast is being received after stop of scanning, the decimal point blinks. Pressing the B key allows you to stop scanning. Precaution z When the MIC/SP jack is used, protect the FT1DR from splash of water. Hints Frequencies of the broadcast stations you listen to frequently can be stored in the memory ( P.39). The AF-DUAL function allows you to monitor amateur band frequencies and memory channels while listening to a radio broadcast. When a signal is received in an amateur band, the radio broadcast audio is muted automatically so that you can perform communication hearing only the amateur band audio (See page 121). Switching between AM Antennas The Set mode is selected. You can switch between AM antennas while listening to an AM broadcast. Switch between antennas according to the use conditions. During normal use, you need not switch between AM antennas. 1 Press and hold the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 2 TX/RX. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 1 MODE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select 1 ANTENNA AM. 7 Press the M key briefly. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 31 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Listening to the Radio 8 Turn the O knob to switch to the desired antenna. Display BAR & EXT. ANTENNA BAR ANTENNA Operation Switches between the whip antenna provided at the top of the FT1DR and the built-in bar antenna to receive AM broadcasts. When the AM broadcast is received, the whip antenna is automatically switched to the built-
in bar antenna. Turn around the FT1DR body to adjust the AM broadcast (middle wave band) receiving sensitivity. 9 Press the M key over 1 second. The Set mode is canceled. Miscellaneous Settings Setting the Date and Time The Set mode is selected. The FT1DR incorporates a clock. The clock is used not only to display the time but also turn on/off the FT1DR at the specified time (timer function). Set the clock before using the FT1DR for the first time. 1 Press the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 7 CONFIG. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 19 DATE & TIME ADJ. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to set the year. 7 Press the B key. 8 Turn the O knob to set the month. 9 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set the day, day of week, hour, and minute. Pressing the % key moves the cursor to the setting item shown on the left. The cursor moves to the month. Remarks The hour is displayed according to the 24-hour clock. Next, set the time signal alarm. If you do not want to set the time signal alarm, proceed to step 3 described in Setting the Time Signal Alarm. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 32 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Miscellaneous Settings Setting the Time Signal Set the time signal (a time signal tone is issued at 00 minute of each hour) as required. 1 Press the B key. 2 Turn the O knob to select TIME SIGNAL. Selecting TIME SIGNAL allows you to hear a time signal tone (beep) at 00 minute The cursor moves to . of each hour. If you do not want to hear the time signal tone, leave as it is. The cursor moves to SET. 3 Press the B key. 4 Press the V key briefly. The setting is determined. 5 Press the M key over 1 second. 6 Press theM key over 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Remarks When MONOBAND RECEPTION is selected, the current time is displayed on the LCD. Hints The accuracy of the clock is 30 seconds/month. However, it may vary depending on the use conditions such as the temperature. The FT1DR incorporates a rechargeable lithium battery dedicated to the clock. Normally, the FT1DR is powered from the battery pack. When the battery pack is detached or runs out, the lithium battery starts operating automatically. The lithium battery can operate the clock for about 2 months. When you use the FT1DR for the first time or by attaching the battery pack which has been detached for a long period, the accuracy of the clock may be poor. In such a case, detach the battery pack temporarily, reattach it, and then adjust the time. When the FT1DR is operating in Mono band, the current time is displayed on the LCD. However, when display of double-size characters or dual display is selected, the current time is not displayed on the LCD. The calendar covers all dates from January 1, 2000 through December 31, 2099. Setting the APRS Set mode 17 GPS TIME SET to AUTO will display the exact time automatically. The timer function allows you to turn off the FT1DR automatically (See page 149). Also, you can turn on the power at the specified time (See page 149). Muting Audio If it is hard to hear the sound of the A-band and the sound of the B-band at the same time, you can mute the sound of the operating band which is not selected now. 1 Press the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 2 TX/RA. 3 Press the M key briefly. The Set mode is selected. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 33 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n Miscellaneous Settings 4 Turn the O knob to select 3 AUDIO. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select 2 MUTE. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Turn the O knob to select a muting level. Remarks You can select one of the following four muting levels:
MUTE 30%
MUTE 50%
MUTE 100%
OFF The larger the value, the smaller the sound. To deactivate the muting function, select OFF. 9 Press the M key over 1 second. 10 Press theM key over 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Remarks When the muting function is activated, the ] icon is displayed on the LCD. When the muting function is being performed (sound is being muted actually), the ] icon blinks on the LCD. Hint When no signal is received on the operating band even if the muting function is activated, sound is not muted. Changing the Transmission Power Level The maximum transmission power of the FT1DR is 5 W. When communicating with a friend in the immediate area or you want to suppress battery power consumption, you can lower the transmission power. For power supply types and transmission power levels, see the table shown below. 1 Press the F key briefly, and the press the 1 key briefly. f is displayed on the LCD. Select your desired transmission power level while f is displayed. The icon and PO meter which correspond to the selected transmission power level appear. The current power level is displayed, for about 2 seconds, in the area where a frequency is displayed. Example: HIGH POWER Battery type Battery pack H (High power) L3 External power supply 5W 2.5W
(13.8 VDC) Battery case
(alkaline batteries) 34 L2 1W 1W L1 0.05W 0.05W FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Hints You can set a transmission power level separately for the A-band and B-band. Use the FT1DR at the minimum required transmission power level to suppress battery power Miscellaneous Settings consumption. By default, HI (High power) is selected. Adjusting the Squelch Level You can mute the raspy noise heard when no signal is being received. The squelch level can be adjusted separately for two broadcasts (NFM and AM) received on the A-band and B-band. When the squelch level is increased, the noise is more liable to disappear but, in some cases, it becomes difficult to receive weak signals. Adjust the squelch level as required. 1 Press the A key. Select the target operating band. 2 Press the F key briefly, and then press the T key. 3 Turn the O knob to adjust the squelch level. Remarks The squelch level can be adjusted within the range from 0 to 15. Default: LEVEL 1 4 Press the T key. The Squelch Level Adjustment mode is canceled. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n Hint While the T key is held pressed, the squelch function can be deactivated for both the A-band and B-band. Changing the Frequency Step Manually The Set mode is selected. By default, AUTO (Step) is selected so that the optimum frequency step is automatically selected according to the received frequency. You can change this frequency step manually. 1 Press the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 7 CONFIG. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 18 STEP. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select your desired frequency step. Remarks Selectable frequency steps are as follows:
AUTO
(8.33 KHz) 15 KHz 50 KHz 5 KHz 10 KHz 20 KHz 100KHz 6.25 KHz 12.5 KHz 25 KHz It is recommended that AUTO be selected normally. Default: AUTO 35 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Miscellaneous Settings 7 Press the M key over 1 second. 8 Press the M key over 1 second again. The Frequency Step Setting mode is canceled. Hints For the AIR band (108 MHz to 136.991 MHz), the frequency step 8.33 kHz can be selected. For bands covering 250MHz to 300MHz and bands covering 580 MHz or higher frequencies, frequency steps 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, and 15 kHz cannot be selected. Changing the Mode Manually The Set mode is selected. By default, AUTO (Auto Mode) is selected so that the optimum mode (radio wave type) is automatically selected according to the selected band (frequency band). You can change this mode manually. 1 Press the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 2 TX/RX. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 1 MODE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select 5 RX MODE. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Turn the O knob to select your desired mode. It is recommended that AUTO be selected normally. Display Operation AUTO The optimum mode is automatically selected according to the frequency band. NFM Only the selected band is switched to the NFM (FM mode). AM Only the selected band is switched to the AM mode. 9 Press the M key over 1 second three times. The Set mode is canceled. Hint Even if the AM mode is selected on an amateur band, 144 MHz band or 430 MHz band, transmission takes place in the FM mode. i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 36 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Locking keys or switches Miscellaneous Settings To prevent accidental frequency change during operation, keys and switches other than the PTT switch, T key, v key, P switch, and dial knob can be locked. 1 Press the P key briefly. l is displayed on the LCD. Remarks To release the lock, press the P key briefly gain. l disappears from the LCD. Hint You can also lock the dial knob and PTT switch by selecting the Set mode 46 LOCK. Restoring to Defaults (All Reset) You can restore all settings and memory contents of the FT1DR to defaults. 1 While pressing the %, D, and X keys, press the P switch. The FT1DR is turned on, followed by beep. When you hear the beep, release the keys. 2 When ALL RESET PUSH F KEY! appears on the LCD, press the F key. Beep is issued again. Remarks To cancel the All Reset function, press a key or switch other than F. Precaution When the All Reset function is performed, all data stored in the memory is deleted. Be sure to record it on paper, etc. before performing the All Reset Function. Hint Also, you can restore only the settings configured in the Set mode to defaults (See page 168). i B a s c O p e r a t i o n 37 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. R e p e a t e r O p e r a t i o n Repeater Operation Repeater Operation Repeater Operation Communicating Via the Repeater The FT1DR supports an ARS (Automatic Repeater Shift) function which allows you to perform communication automatically just by setting the reception frequency to the repeater frequency. 1 Set the reception frequency to the repeater frequency. is displayed in the upper right corner of the TN LCD. 2 While pressing the p switch, perform transmission. Hints Pressing the F key, and then pressing the 5 key. This produces the reverse state where the transmission frequency and the reception frequency are temporarily reversed, allowing you to check whether you can communicate with the remote station directly. blinks on the LCD. In the reverse state, Press the F key, and then press the 5 key again. This cancels the reverse state. Press and hold the M key over 1 second to change the Set mode. This allows you to use the repeater more conveniently. 7 CONFIG 14 RPT ARS You can deactivate the ARS function. 7 CONFIG 15 RPT SHIFT You can set the repeater shift direction. 7 CONFIG 16 RPT SHIFT FREQ You can change the repeater shift step. 38 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Memory A Wide Variety of Memory Functions The FT1DR provides the following various types of memory channels in addition to the regular memory channels (memory numbers 1 to 900). Home channels which can be recalled on each frequency band with one touch of a key. (See page 40) Special banks such as a international VHF (marine) radios (57 channels). 99 (901 to 999) skip search memory channels that allow you to skip unwanted frequencies during VFO scanning (See page 57) 50 sets of memory channels (L01/U01 to L50/U50) for programmable memory scanning (PMS) (See page 62) An operating frequency, operation mode (type of radio), and other operational information can be stored for each regular memory channel, home channel, or PMS memory channel. Operating frequency Repeater information Memory skip information Transmission power Operation mode Tone information Memory tag DCS information Memory channels can be sorted out with them assigned to memory banks according to the intended use. The FT1DR allows you to use 24 types of memory banks. A maximum of 100 memory channels can be assigned to each memory bank. Memory Configuration of FT1DR Memory channels
(900 channels) Skip search memory channels Memory channels PMS
(99 channels)
(50 sets) 0 0 9 9 9 8 4 3 2 1 9 9 9 8 9 9 4 0 9 3 0 9 2 0 9 1 0 9 0 5 U
/
0 5 L 9 4 U 9 4 L
/
4 U 4 L
/
3 U 3 L
/
2 U 2 L
/
1 U 1 L
/
Home channels
(7 channels) Special banks i
) 2
(
d n a b o d a r n o i t a m r o f n I i o d a r n o i t a v A i d n a b F H V d n a b z H M 4 4 1 d n a b d n a b F H U d n a b z H M 0 3 4 i
) 1
(
d n a b o d a r n o i t a m r o f n I Memory banks
(24 banks) Up to 100 channels can be memorized on each band. Memory channels for international VHF (marine) radios
(57 channels) U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 39 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Writing into the Memory Precaution The stored data can be erased due to wrong operation, static electricity, or electrical noise. Also, it can be erased in the case of a failure or repair. Be sure to write it down on paper or the like. The FT1DR allows you to use 900 channels (memory channel numbers 1 to 900). 1 Select the VFO mode. 2 Turn the O knob to select a frequency. Select the frequency you want to write into the memory. 3 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Memory Write mode is selected, and the number of the memory channel next to the memory channel for which you stored a frequency last blinks. Remarks To cancel the memory write operation, press the p switch. To store a frequency with a memory channel specified, turn the O knob to select the memory channel
[The specified channel is unregistered] ( icon is displayed, and the memory channel blinks.
[The specified channel is registered] ) icon is displayed, and OVERWRITE OK? is displayed on the LCD. Pressing the M key allows you to skip channels quickly in steps of 100 channels. 4 Press the F key briefly. The memory write operation is completed, and the registered frequency is displayed on the LCD. Hints By default, 145.000MHz was registered to memory channel 1. It can be changed to another frequency, but cannot be deleted. The frequency which has previously been registered to a memory channel can be overwritten with a new frequency. When you intend to write a new frequency into the memory, an unregistered memory channel is displayed. To display the lowest unregistered memory number when you start writing into the memory, press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode, and then select 3 MEMORY 6 MEMORY WRITE. To inhibit writing into all memories, press the M key more than 1 second, and then select 3 MEMORY 4 MEMORY PROTECT. U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 40 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Split Memory Two different frequencies, one for reception and other for transmission, can be registered to a memory channel. 1 Write a reception frequency into the memory. Remarks Write the reception frequency with reference to Writing Data into Memories above. 2 Select a transmission frequency in the VFO mode. 3 Press the F key more than 1 second. 4 Turn the O knob to select a channel number. Select the channel number of which you registered a reception frequency. 5 While pressing the p switch, press the F key briefly. When you recall the memory channel of which you registered two different frequencies, one for reception and the other for transmission, the @ icon is displayed on the LCD. Recalling a Memory Channel Recall a registered memory channel in the following procedure:
1 Press the V key. The Memory mode is selected, and the memory channel you used last is displayed on the LCD. 2 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel. Select the memory channel to use next. Remarks You can directly recall a memory channel using numeric
keys. To recall memory channel 15:15V Pressing the F key briefly and turning the O knob allows you to skip channels quickly in step of 10 channels. 3 Press the V key. The Memory mode is canceled, and the frequency selected in the VFO mode is displayed. Hints Unregistered memory channels are skipped. By default, the priority memory channel used as the priority channel for the dual receive function was set to the memory channel 1. P is displayed at the upper right of the memory channel number
(See page 128). The memory content can be transferred to the VFO of the operating band in the following procedure:
Press the F key for 1 second. Press the V key. OVERWRITE OK? is displayed. Press the V key. Selecting the Memory Only mode in the following procedure allows you to use only memory channels. While pressing the V key, press the P key. To cancel the Memory Only mode, press the V key again while pressing the P key (See page 155). U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 41 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Recalling the Home Channel 1 Press the F key briefly. The home channel of the currently selected frequency band is displayed on the LCD. Hints For the relationship between the frequency bands and the home channel frequencies, see the table on the next page. Selecting a frequency by turning the O key allows you to return to the VFO mode. Returning to the Previous Frequency 1 Press the F key briefly. The frequency used before recalling the home channel is displayed on the LCD. Frequency band Frequency Frequency band Frequency Shortwave band [1]
1.800 MHz Information radio (1) [6]
380.000 MHz 50 MHz [2]
51.000 MHz 430 MHz band [7]
433.000 MHz Aviation radio [3]
108.000 MHz 470 to 770 MHz band [8]
481.750 MHz 144 MHz band [4]
145.000 MHz Information radio (2) [9]
860.000 MHz 174 to 222 MHz band [5]
175.750 MHz O Changing a Home Channel Frequency You can change a default home channel frequency. 1 Select the VFO mode. 2 Turn the O knob to select a frequency. Select a frequency to change. 3 Press the F key more than 1 second. 4 Press the X key briefly. 5 Press the X key briefly. When the new frequency has been written, the home channel frequency of the OVERWRITE OK? is displayed on the LCD for about 5 seconds. The Write mode is selected. selected frequency band is changed. Deleting the Memory Channel 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O key to select the memory channel to delete. 4 Press the D key briefly. CLRAR OK? is displayed on the LCD for about 3 seconds. Remarks Pressing the F key allows you to cancel the memory channel deletion operation. U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 42 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. A Wide Variety of Memory Functions 5 Press the D key briefly. The memory channel is deleted. Remarks To delete other memory channels, repeat steps 2-5. Precaution z Memory channel 1 cannot be deleted. Hint The memory channel specified as a priority memory channel cannot be deleted. Before deleting it, specify another memory channel as a priority memory. Restoring the Deleted Memory Channel The memory channel used last is displayed. You can restore a deleted memory channel. 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select the memory channel to restore. 4 Press the D key briefly. The deleted memory channel is restored. Using Memory Banks Registered memory channels can be sorted out according to the intended use. The FT1DR allows you to use 24 types of banks. A maximum of 100 memory channels can be assigned to each memory bank. One memory channel can be registered in two or more memory banks. If the memory channel registered in the memory bank is changed or updated, the content of the corresponding memory channel in the memory bank is automatically changed or updated. Memory channel Memory bank
144MHz band is registered. 430MHz band is registered. Amateur bands are registered together. AIR band is registered. U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 43 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using Memory Banks Registering a Memory Channel in a Memory Bank 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel. Select the memory channel to register in a memory bank. 3 Press the F key more than 1 second. 4 Turn the O knob to select a memory bank number. Select the number (B1 to B24) of the memory bank to The Memory Write mode is selected. Bank No. Bank mane register the memory channel. 5 Press the F key briefly. The memory channel is registered in the memory bank. Hints U s n g i t h e M e m o r y When registering preset memory channels of the special bank in a memory bank, see Registering Your Favorite Special Memory Channels in a Memory Bank on page 48. When selecting a memory bank using the O knob, the memory channel, skip search memory channel, and programmable memory channel are also displayed on the LCD. They are repeatedly displayed on the LCD in the following order:
1 2 3 ... L50 U50 BANK1 BANK2 ... BANK24 1 2... When the displayed number is close to 1, turning the O knob counterclockwise will display memory banks. When the displayed number is close to U50, turning the O knob clockwise will display memory banks. Pressing the M key briefly displays memory banks quickly in steps of 100 memory channels. If the bank name was changed, the changed bank name is displayed. The icon is displayed for a memory bank in which no memory channel is registered, and the icon is displayed for a memory bank in which at least one memory channel is registered. Recalling a Memory Bank 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the B key. Pressing the B key toggles between the memory channel number and bank number. 3 Press the F key, and then press the B key. 4 Turn the O knob to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank. 5 Press the B key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel. Select a memory channel in the memory bank. The memory bank to be used is determined. Remarks To select another memory bank, repeat steps 3-5. To return to the Regular Memory mode, press the B key briefly. 44 Bank No. Memory channel number Bank No. Bank name
FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using Memory Banks Canceling Memory Channel Registration in a Memory Bank 1 Recall the memory bank subject to cancellation of memory channel registration. By referring to Recalling a Memory Bank, recall the memory bank in which the memory channel subject to cancellation is registered. 2 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel. Select a memory channel subject to cancellation. 3 Press the F key more than 1 second, and then press the D key. Registration of memory channel in the memory bank is cancelled, returning to the memory bank display state. If no other memory channel is registered in the memory bank, the memory bank having the lowest bank number is displayed. Convenient Special Banks Frequencies of international VHF (marine) radios (57 channels), are preset in the special bank memories, and these channels can be selected in advance from region to region. International VHF (marine) radio preset memory SP2 International VHF ...................................................................................................................Page 51 Frequencies (57 channels) used for international VHF (marine) radios are assigned to the dedicated special bank. World broadcast preset memory SP5 Shortwave Broadcasts ..................Page 00 You can listen to major broadcasts around the world (total 89 channels). U s n g i t h e M e m o r y Registering Your Favorite Special Memory Channels in a Memory Bank You can register your favorite special memory channel in a memory bank. 1 Turn the O knob to select a special memory channel. Select your favorite special memory channel. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Memory Bank Write mode is selected. The f icon blinks on the display. Remarks To cancel registration, press the p key. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory bank number. Select the memory bank in which you want to register your favorite special memory channel. 4 Press the F key briefly. The special memory channel is registered in the memory bank, and the frequency is displayed on the LCD. 45 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Convenient Special Banks Recalling a Special Bank to Listen to the International VHF (Marine) Radio The frequencies (57 channel) used for the international VHF (marine) radio are registered in the dedicated special bank. 1 Press the A key. Set the A-band to the operating band. 2 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 3 key. 3 Press the B key. Select INTERNATIONAL VHF. 4 Turn the O knob to select a channel. Select the channel of your favorite international VHF. The Special Bank mode is selected.
Remarks To cancel reception of the international VHF, press the 3 key.
Precaution Article 59 of the Radio Law stipulates that radio communication with a specific remote party shall not be intercepted, and its existence or contents shall not be leaked or used surreptitiously. By law, leak or surreptitious use of other peoples conversation is prohibited. Hints The special bank cannot be rewritten with the data of another frequency. To scan special bank channels toward higher channel numbers, press the B key more than 1 second, and then release it. Turning the O knob one click counterclockwise will scan channels toward lower channel numbers. If a signal is received during scanning, the current frequency is held for 5 seconds with scanning suspended. The operation to perform when scanning stops can be set following the procedure described in the Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 57. You can register your favorite international VHF (marine) radio in a memory bank following the procedure described in Registering Your Favorite Special Memory Channels in a Memory Bank on page 48. U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 46 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Frequencies of International VHF (Marine) radios Registered in Special Bank Channel No. Frequency (MHz) Channel No. Frequency (MHz) Convenient Special Banks Convenient Special Banks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 160.650*
160.700*
160.750*
160.800*
160.850*
156.300 156.350 160.950*
156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 161.500*
161.550*
161.600*
161.650*
161.700*
161.750*
161.800*
161.850*
161.900*
161.950*
162.000*
Channel No. Frequency (MHz) Channel No. Frequency (MHz) 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 160.625*
160.675*
160.725*
160.775*
160.825*
160.875*
160.925*
156.375 156.425 156.475 156.525 156.575 156.625 156.675 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 156.725 156.775 156.825 156.875 156.955 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.550*
161.575*
161.625*
161.675*
161.725*
161.775*
161.825*
161.875*
161.925*
161.975*
162.025*
Remarks
* is the frequency of the base station. For example, if channel 1 is selected, the base station frequency 160.650 MHz and the @ icon are displayed. Pressing the F key briefly and then pressing the 5 key briefly displays the Ship Station frequency 160.650 MHz is displayed and the @
icon blinks. The base station frequency minus 4.6 MHz equals the Ship Station frequency, and duplex operation starts. To return to the base station frequency, press the F key briefly, and then press the 5 key briefly. U s n g i t h e M e m o r y 47 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Scanning Function Using the Scanning Function The FT-1DR supports the following four scan modes:
(1) VFO Scan
(2) Memory Scan
(3) Programmable Memory Scan
(4) Selected Memory Channel Scan VFO Scan 1 Select the VFO mode, and then select a band to scan. 2 While pressing the B key, turn the O knob to specify the scanning range. Specify the scanning range as follows. Display*
Operation ALL Scans all bands within the range from the current frequency to 108-999 MHz.
(PMS number) 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz BAND Shortcuts the PMS scanning procedure (steps 1 and 2 described on page 46). If PMS memories have been registered in advance, PMS memory numbers are displayed. Turn the O knob to select the PMS memory you want to scan, and then scan the PMS range. Scans the current band (see the table on the next page) within 1 MHz of the current frequency. Scans the current band (see the table on the next page) within 2 MHz of the current frequency. Scans the current band (see the table on the next page) within 5 MHz of the current frequency. Scans the current band (see the table on the next page) starting with the current frequency. 3 Release the B key. Scanning (SCAN) starts toward higher frequencies. Hints While the B key is pressed down, the scanning range is displayed on the LCD. When a signal is received during scanning, the decimal point blinks. Turn the O knob clockwise.: Scanning is performed toward higher frequencies. Turn the O knob counterclockwise.: Scanning is performed toward lower frequencies. When a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and its frequency is displayed for 5 seconds. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the signal for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. Precaution The difference between the upper limit frequency and the lower limit frequency for PMS must be 100 kHz or more. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 48 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Canceling Scanning To cancel scanning, press the p switch. Hints Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. Turn the O knob to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can finish the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. A-band and B-band reception frequencies Frequency band No. A-BAND B-band
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) 1.8 MHz to 30 MHz
(Shortwave band) 30 MHz to 76 MHz
(50 MHz band ) 108 MHz to 137 MHz
(Aviation radio band) 108 MHz to 137 MHz
(Aviation radio band) 137 MHz to 174 MHz 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band)
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz 174 MHz to 222 MHz 222 MHz to 420 MHz 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(Information radio band (1))
(Information radio band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band)
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 770 MHz 470 MHz to 770 MHz 770 MHz to 999 MHz
(Information radio band (2)) For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 57. Press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode, and then select the following items for more convenient use:
7 CONFIG 3 BEEP EDGE: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached. 7 CONFIG 3 BEEP SELECT: Prevents a beep from being emitted when scanning stops. 5 SCAN 2 SCAN LAMP: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops. Skipping a Frequency You Do Not Want Scan (Skip Search Memory) Scanning may stop at a frequency that you do not want to receive. Such a frequency can be skipped by storing it in the skip search memory. Up to 99 frequencies can be saved in the skip search memory (memory channels 901 to 999). i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 49 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Specifying the Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan 1 Start VOF scanning. Start VOF scanning with reference to VFO Scanning on page 63. 2 When scanning stops at the frequency you do not want to receive, press the F key more than 1 second. Numbers of unprogrammed skip search memory channels blink. Hints Turning the O knob allows you to specify other skip search memory channels. 3 Press the F key briefly. The frequency is saved in the skip search memory, and scanning resumes. Hints You can specify the frequency you do not want to receive by using the following procedure in advance:
1 In the VFO mode, tune in to the frequency you do not want to scan. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select a skip search memory channel. 4 Press the F key briefly. To cancel scanning, press the p key. Deleting a Frequency Saved in the Skip Search Memory The frequency saved in the skip search memory can be deleted in the following procedure. After this, the deleted frequency is scanned. 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel of the skip search memory. Select the memory channel (901-999) containing the frequency you want to delete. When selecting a memory channel, pressing the M key allows you to skip memory channel numbers in steps of 100 memory channel numbers. DELETE OK? is displayed on the LCD. 4 Press the D key. 5 Press the X key. The saved frequency is deleted. Hints To delete another frequency from the skip search memory, repeat steps 2-4. Hint Restoring the Frequency Deleted from the Skip Search Memory If you have not specified a new frequency for the same memory channel, you can restore the deleted frequency by repeating steps 1-4. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 50 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops When scanning stops, you can select one of the following three reception methods:
(1) The signal is received for the specified period of time, and then scanning resumes. You can specify this period of time in steps of 0.5 second within the range from 2 seconds to 10 seconds.
(2) The signal is received until it fades out. Two seconds after the signal fades out, scanning resumes. BUSY is displayed on the LCD.
(3) Scanning stops and the current frequency is received. HOLD is displayed on the LCD. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 5 SCAN. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 4 SCAN RESUME. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select a reception method. Select a reception method from 2 SEC TO 10 SEC (0.5 SEC STEP), BUSY, and HOLD. 7 Press the M key more than 1 second. The selected reception method is determined. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Hints The reception method selected here is also applied to VFO Scanning, Programmable Memory Scanning, and Dual Reception. The BUSY scanning start time can be changed by selecting the Set mode item 3 SCAN RE-START. Memory Scanning Frequencies saved in the memory can be scanned in the order of memory channel number. 1 Select the Memory mode, and recall memory channel. 2 While pressing the B key, turn the O knob to specify While the B key is pressed down, the scanning range is displayed. the scanning range. Specify the scanning range with reference to the table on the next page. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n When a signal is received, the decimal point blinks. 51 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n Using the Scanning Function 3 Release the B key. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. While the B key is pressed down, the scanning rage is displayed on the LCD. When a signal is received, the decimal point blinks. Hints Turn the O knob clockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn the O knob counterclockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To cancel scanning, press the p switch. Hints Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. Turn the O knob to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can finish the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. When memory channels are recalled, they are regular memory channels (memory numbers 1-900). When a memory bank is recalled, only the memory channels in the memory bank are scanned. For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 57. Press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode, and then select the following items for more convenient use:
7 CONFIG 3 BEEP EDGE: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached. 7 CONFIG 3 BEEP SELECT: Prevents a beep from being emitted when scanning stops. 5 SCAN 2 SCAN LAMP: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops. Precaution The difference between the upper limit frequency and the lower limit frequency for PMS must be 100 kHz or more. Display ALL CH
(PMS No.) BAND Operation Scans all memory channels (1-900) of the currently selected memory. When selected memory channels are specified, all of them are scanned (See page 59). Shortcuts the PMS scanning procedure (steps 1 and 2 described on page 62). When a PMS memory has been registered in advance, its number is displayed. Turn the O knob to select the PMS memory you want to scan, and then scan the range between the upper and lower limits of the PMS. Scans only the memory channels for which frequencies in the same frequency band*1 as that of the currently selected memory are saved. When selected memory channels are specified, scans only the selected memory channels for which frequencies in the same frequency band*1 as that of the currently selected memory are saved (See page 59).
*1 For the relationship between frequency bands and reception frequencies, see the table at the bottom of page 56. 52 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel You can specify two types of memory channels, a skip memory channel and a selected memory channel, for effective memory scanning. Skip memory channel: You can specify a memory channel that need not be scanned Selected memory channel: You can specify selected memory channels so that only during memory scanning. the specific memory channels are scanned during memory scanning. 1 Select the Memory mode, and then recall the memory Stays lit for the skip memory. channel you want to specify as a skip memory channel or a selected memory channel. The Set mode is selected. 2 Press the M key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select 3 MEMORY. 4 Press the M key briefly. 5 Turn the O knob to select 5 MEMORY SKIP. 6 Press the M key briefly. 7 Turn the O knob to select OFF, SKIP, or SELECT. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Hints To cancel a skip/selected memory channel, select [OFF]. Blinks for the selected memory channel. When it is canceled, the icon on the LCD disappears. Skip memory channel
[SKP]
O
[OFF]
Selected memory channel
[SELECT]
i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 53 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Scanning Only the Selected Memory Channel 1 Select the Memory mode, and then recall the selected memory channel. 2 While pressing the B key, turn the O knob to specify the scanning range. Hints For the scanning range to be specified, see the table on page 66. 3 Release the B key. Hints Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Only the selected memory channel is scanned. If a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and scanning stops for 5 seconds to receive the current frequency. While scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the display stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To cancel scanning, press the p key briefly. Scanning a Memory Bank The Memory mode is selected. Only the memory channels in the recalled memory bank can be scanned. 1 Press the V key. 2 Press the B key briefly. Recall a memory bank. Pressing the B key briefly toggles between MEMORY NO. and BANK (No.). Hints To recall another memory bank, press the F key briefly, and the press the B key briefly. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank from among BANK 1 to BANK 24. 4 Press the B key briefly. 5 While pressing the B key, turn the O knob to specify the scanning range. The selected memory bank is determined. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n Hints For the scanning range to be specified, see the table on page 66. 6 Release the B key. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Hints Turn the O knob clockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn the O knob counterclockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To cancel scanning, press the p switch. 54 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Memory Bank Link Scan Using the Scanning Function BANK 10 BANK 24 BANK 1 The Memory mode is selected. During regular memory bank scanning, only the memory channels assigned to the recalled memory bank are scanned. During memory bank link scanning, memory channels registered in two or more previously specified banks can be scanned. 1 Press the V key. 2 Press the B key briefly. Recall a memory bank. 3 Press the F key briefly, and then press the B key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank subject to bank link scanning. 5 Press the V key briefly. Select the bank link. The memory bank number change from B to b. The memory bank number changes from B to b, indicating that the bank link has been activated 6 Repeat steps 2-4 to select another memory bank. Hints For the scanning range to be specified, see the table on page 66. 7 Press the B key briefly. 8 While pressing the B key, specify a scanning range. The memory banks subject to memory bank scanning are determined. Hints For the scanning range to be specified, see the table on page 66. 9 Release the B key. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Hints Turn the O knob clockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn the O knob counterclockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To cancel scanning, press the p switch. O Canceling Bank Link Scanning 1 Press the F key briefly, and then press the B key briefly. 2 Recall the link for which bank link scanning was specified. 3 Press the V key briefly. The memory bank number changes from b to B, indicating that the bank link has been deactivated. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 55 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Programmable Memory Scan (PMS) Writing into a Programmable Memory 50 sets of PMS memory channels (L1/U1 to L50/U50) are available. Specify the lower limit frequency of the frequency range you want to san for L, and the upper limit frequency for U. Enter a number between 1 and 50 for . Use the same number for the lower and upper limit channels. Specify the lower limit frequency and upper limit frequency for the PMS memory channels according to page 39. PMS memory channels are located late in the memory channel area. When there are 100 or more memory channels, press the M key to skip memory channels quickly in steps of 100 memory channels. Example: Specification of the lower limit frequency 433.200 MHz and the upper limit frequency 433.700 MHz for PMS Precaution The difference between the upper limit frequency and the lower limit frequency for PMS must be 100 kHz or more. Performing Programmable Memory Scan The programmable memory allows you to scan the specified frequency range in the same frequency band. 1 Select the Memory mode. Recall the PMS memory storing the lower limit frequency or upper limit frequency. 2 Press the B key, and then turn the O knob to select a PMS channel. 3 Release the B key. Programmable memory scanning starts. Hints Turn the O knob clockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn the O knob counterclockwise.:
Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. The decimal point blinks. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To select another PMS memory , press the B knob to select it while pressing the O. To cancel scanning, press the p switch. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 56 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Scanning Function Hints If PMS memory channels have already been assigned to L1/U1 to L50/U50, selecting a PMS number in the VFO scanning procedure described on page 56 allows you to skip step 1 described above. When a skip memory (P) is specified for L or U or when the lower/upper limit frequency is not properly specified, program memory scanning is not performed properly. Press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode, and then select the following items for more convenient use:
7 CONFIG 3 BEEP EDGE: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached. 5 SCAN 2 SCAN LAMP: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops. Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. Turn the O knob to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can finish the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press the F key briefly. Press the T key. Using the Search Function Spectrum Scope Searching for a Signal Using a Signal Strength Graph During mono band reception in the VFO mode, strengths of channel signals around the current frequency can be graphically displayed on the LCD. 1 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 2 key. Use states of 16 channels (eight channels above the current frequency and eight channels below the current frequency) are checked and the corresponding signal strengths are displayed graphically on the LCD. 2 Turn the O knob to move the icon to the signal position. The signal at the center frequency can be received. Hints To resume scanning, press the V key. 3 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 2 key. The spectrum scope is deactivated. Hints Normally, the spectrum scope can check 16 channels around the current frequency. Pressing the A key allows you to select the channel check range from among 5, 9, 16, 24, and 50. When 5 is selected, numeric values representing signal strengths are displayed in the graph. The spectrum scope channel interval is the same as the VFO frequency step. When the spectrum scope is running, numeric, %, X, and D keys cannot be used. By default, channel use states are displayed graphically after completion of scanning, and the sound of the signal at the center frequency is output if such signal is detected. Turning the O knob allows you to restart scanning. Selecting 1 DISPLAY 2 BAND SCOPE CONTINUOUS in the Set mode allows you to view the latest use states through repetitive scanning. To stop scanning, press the V key. To stop spectrum analysis, press the F key, and then press the 2 key. Selecting 1 DISPLAY 2 BAND SCOPE FULL TIME in the Set mode allows sound to be emitted with the spectrum scope running. However, sound cannot be emitted in frequency bands 580 MHz to 999 MHz. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 57 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the GPS Function Using the GPS Function What is GPS?
GPS (Global Positioning System) is a space-based satellite navigation system that provides location and time information anywhere on the earth. It was developed by the U.S. Department of Defense as a military system. It receives signals from three or more of about 30 GPS satellites flying at an altitude of about 20,000 km, and displays the current position (latitude, longitude, and altitude) within a tolerance of several meters. In addition, GPS can receive the exact time from the satellites onboard atomic clock. Activating the GPS Function To activate the GPS function, select 8 APROS 23GPS POWER, and then select GPS ON in the Set mode. Hint Default: ON When the GPS function of the FT1DR is turned ON, internal clock settings and position settings for your station are automatically obtained from the GPS data. Precaution z Data for the current day of the week is not automatically obtained. Set the day of the week manually with reference to page . The Set mode is selected. 1 Press the M key over 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 8 APRS. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 16 GPS POWER. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select GPS ON. 7 Press the M key for more than 1 second. 8 Press the M key for more than 1 second again. The GPS function is turned ON. The Set mode is canceled. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 58 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Activating the GPS Function Hints Information about the current positions of radio stations provided by GPS can be saved in 10 memories (P1 to P10). Saved position information can be used to set the position of your station
(See page 111). When the GPS function is active, power consumption increases about 40 mA. As a result, the battery life is reduced by about 20% compared to when the GPS function is deactivated. To use the GPS function during APRS operation, be sure to select 8 APRS 27 MY POSITION, and then select GPS in the Set mode. Method of Positioning by GPS 1 Turn on the FT1DR. 2 Shortly press the M key twice. Pressing the M key switches among FT1DR screens in the following order:
Usual frequency display BACK TRACK display GPS display ARTS-D The GPS screen appears. display WiRES-X display Precaution The ARTS-D screen and the WiRES-X screen are displayed when the corresponding functions are active. Since the FT1DR searches satellites, it requires a few minutes to display the positioning result. 3 GPS data is displayed. An arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading), your current position, number of satellites, longitude, latitude, and altitude are displayed on the screen. Hints The arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) will not appear and the latitude/altitude blinks until GPS satellite data is acquired. When GPS satellite data has been acquired, the arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) will appear, the latitude/altitude will change from blinking to lit, and your current position will be displayed. If acquisition of GPS satellite data is interrupted due to an obstacle, such as a building or tunnel, only the arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) disappears. 4 Press the A key to scroll the screen. Pressing the A key scrolls the screen and displays the current time. Pressing the A key again displays GPS data. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 59 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Method of Positioning by GPS About Positioning by GPS Positioning refers to calculation of your current position from the satellite orbit information and radio propagation time. At least three satellites need to be captured for successful positioning. If positioning fails, move away from buildings as far as possible and stand in an area with open sky. About errors A positioning error by several hundred meters can occur due to the environmental conditions. Under favorable conditions, positioning can be performed successfully using only three satellites. However, under the following poor conditions, the positioning accuracy can decrease or positioning can fail.
- Between high-rise buildings
- On a narrow road between buildings
- In a room or behind a building
- Under high-voltage cable or overpass
- Between trees such as in the woods
- In a tunnel or underground
- Usage behind heat reflective glass
- Places with strong magnetic fields When using the GPS function for the first time today When you use the GPS function for the first time after purchase of the FT1DR or today, a few minutes are required to search for satellites. Also, when using the GPS function after turning off the FT1DR for several hours, a few minutes are required to search for satellites. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 60 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation Activating the GPS function displays the following information on the LCD. a e d a Compass: North-UP (North is always up.) Heading-UP: (When B is pressed, the direction in which you are heading is always up. A white arrow icon is displayed. H is displayed at the lower right of the compass icon.) b c f g icon is displayed. b Positioning: When at least three satellites have been captured, the This icon is not displayed if it cannot capture at least three icons. Press the A key to scroll the screen until the current time appears. h c Number of satellites:
d Latitude:
Displays the number of captured satellites. The current position is displayed using north (N) or south
(S) latitude. Display format: X DDMM. MMM X: X=N: North latitude, X=S: South latitude DD: Degree MM.MMM: Minute Example: N 3538.250 (35 degrees, 38 minutes, 15 seconds north latitude) e Longitude: The current position is displayed using east (E) or west
(S) longitude. Format: X DDDMM. MMM X: X=E: East longitude, X=W: West longitude DDD: Degree MM.MMM: Minute Example: E 13942.500 (139 degrees, 42 minutes, 30 seconds east latitude) The speed at which you are moving is displayed. Format: SPD aaakm/h Example: SPD 5 km/h The altitude of the current position of your radio station is displayed. Format: ALT aaaaam Example: ALT 20m The current time set by GPS is displayed. Format: aa (hour): bb (minute): cc (second) Example: 23: 59: 59
* When an external GPS device is connected to the data terminal, the time is displayed as follows:
aa (hour): bb (minute) f Speed:
g Altitude:
h Time:
U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 61 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation Hints Selecting 8 APRS 18 GPS UNIT in the APRS/GPS Set mode allows you to change the unit of GPS data. When the GPS function is used, the accurate time data (date and time) obtained from GPS is displayed on a 24 hour basis. This time data is reflected in the time data displayed on the GPS screen and APRS screen. However, data for the day of the week is not automatically obtained from GPS. Set the day of the week manually referring to Setting the Clock on page . Selecting 8 APRS 15 GPS DATUM in the APRS/GPS Set mode allows you to change the geodetic system of the built-in GPS unit. However, since APRS uses the geodetic system of WGS-
84, it is recommended not to change it. Selecting 8 APRS 24 TIME ZONE in the APRS/GPS Set mode allows you to set the time zone by units of 30 minutes. When the GPS function is active, the power consumption increases by about 40 mA. As a result, the battery life is reduced by about 20% compared to when the GPS function is deactivated. Selecting 8 APRS 13 COM PORT SETTING and then setting INPUT to GPS in the APRS/
GPS Set mode allows you to obtain position information from a external GPS device. In this case, the data obtained from the internal GPS is disabled. When using an external GPS device, keep it away from the FT1DR. BACK TRACK Function This function allows you to return to the previously saved position (maximum of two positions) using the GPS function. For example, if the position where you parked your car (such as certain position in a wide parking area of a theme park or shopping center) has been saved in the FT1DR, you can return to your car without getting lost by following the guidance on the screen of the FT1DR. The BACKTRACK function screen appears. The POINT(L1/L2) selection screen appears. Causing the FT1DR to Memorize the Current Point 1 Press the M key briefly. 2 Press the B key briefly. 3 Turn the O knob and select POINT L1 or POINT L2. 4 Press the V key. Saves the current position. 5 Press the B key. Returns to the BACKTRACK function screen. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 62 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. BACK TRACK Function The BACK TRACK function screen appears. Using the BACK TRACK Function 1 Press the M key briefly. 2 Turn the O knob and select POINT L1 or POINT L2. 3 Press the B key. Returns to the BACK TRACK function screen. 4 Press the V key. The BACK TRACK function is activated. The saved position (destination) appears in the direction of the arrow within the circle. Walk forward so that the arrow stays pointing up on the screen. When the distance (DST) to the saved position becomes 0.1 km*, it will be indicated by four beeps.
* 100 m to 200 m When the distance (DST) to the saved position becomes 0.0 km*, it will be indicated by a short beep melody.
* 0 m to 100 m When you reach the destination, the screen changes as shown on the right, it will be indicated by a short beep, and the LED glows white. Description of the BACK TRACK Function Screen POINT: Displays the saved position (L1 or L2). DST: Displays the linear distance to the saved position. GPS: Displays the number of captured GPS satellites. Arrow in circle: Indicates the direction toward the saved position. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 63 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Useful Functions Useful Functions Dual Reception (DW) Functions The FT1DR supports the following three dual reception functions:
(1) Dial dual reception
(2) Memory dual reception
(3) Home channel dual reception The signal of the specified memory channel (priority memory channel) is checked at intervals of about 5 seconds. If this signal is detected, it is received. Example: Check of the signal of priority memory channel 90 during reception of 145.500 MHz Frequency being received The signal of the priority memory channel 90 is checked at intervals of about 5 seconds. If the signal of the priority channel 90 is received, the decimal point blinks. Dial Dual Reception VFO mode Priority memory channel 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Write mode is selected, and the f icon and the channel number on the LCD blink. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel, and then press the B key more than 1 second. P is displayed. Select a memory channel (priority memory channel) whose VDW is displayed. signal is to be received preferentially. P is displayed on the LCD. The Write mode is canceled. 4 Select the frequency to be received. Select the frequency to be received constantly. 5 Press the F key more than 1 second. 6 Press the V key more than 1 second. Dial dual reception starts, and VDW is displayed on the LCD. 7 Press the V key briefly. Dial dual reception is canceled. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 64 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Memory Dual Reception Memory channel Priority memory channel Dual Reception (DW) Functions 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Write mode is selected, and the f icon and the channel number on the LCD blink. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel, and then P is displayed. press the B key briefly. Select a memory channel (priority memory channel) whose signal is to be received preferentially. P is displayed on the LCD. 4 Select the memory channel whose signal is to be received. Select the memory channel whose signal is to be received MDW is displayed. constantly. The Write mode is canceled. 5 Press the F key more than 1 second. 6 Press the V key more than 1 second. Memory dual reception starts, and MDW is displayed on the LCD. 7 Press the V key briefly. Memory dual reception is canceled. Home Channel Dual Reception Home channel Priority memory channel 1 Select the Memory mode. 2 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Write mode is selected, and the f icon and the channel number on the LCD blink. 3 Turn the O knob to select a memory channel, and then press the B key briefly. Select a memory channel (priority memory channel) whose signal is to be received preferentially. P is displayed on the LCD. 4 Press the F key briefly, and then press the 4 key. Recall the home channel. 5 Press the F key more than 1 second. The Write mode is canceled. P is displayed. HDW is displayed. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 65 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Dual Reception (DW) Functions 6 Press the V key more than 1 second. Home channel dual reception starts, and HDW is displayed on the LCD. 7 Press the V key briefly. Home channel dual reception is canceled. Precaution Be sure to assign a memory channel to the priority memory channel in advance. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s Hints By default, memory channel 1 is assigned to the priority memory channel. Pressing the M key more than 1 second and changing the Set mode allows you to use this function more conveniently. 5 SCAN 1 PRI TIME: Allows you to change the priority channel monitoring interval. 5 SCAN4 SCAN RESUME: Allows you to change dual reception restart conditions. The constantly received frequency can be freely combined with the frequency band and mode of the priority memory channel. When the signal of the priority memory channel is received, its frequency is received for 5 seconds, and then dual reception resumes. Even during priority channel reception, pressing the p key deactivates the dual reception function, allowing you to perform communication using that frequency. Using the DTMF Function DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones refer to the tones (beep boop beep) heard from the receiver of the push-button phone. You can register the telephone number for phone patch connection to the public telephone line, etc. with a DTMF code comprising up to 16 characters (for up to 10 channels). 1 Press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 5 DTMF SELECT. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select a channel. Select a number (1-10) to which the DTMF code is to be assigned. 7 Press the B key. 8 Turn the O knob to enter a DTMF code. Hints The DTMF code can also be entered using keypad keys. To correct the DTMF code, press the B (to the right) or
% (to the left) key to move the cursor to the character you want to correct, and enter a correct character over it. Pressing the X key more than 1 second allows you to delete the character at the cursor position and the subsequent characters. 66 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the DTMF Function 9 Press the B key. 10 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the remaining characters of The cursor moves. the DTMF code. Hints The maximum length of the DTMF code is 16 characters. 11 Locate the cursor at the last character, and then press the M key more than 1 second. The DTMF code is determined. 12 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Confirming the Entered DTMF Code by the Sound The Set mode is selected. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 5 DTMF SELECT. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select a registered channel. 7 Press the F key briefly. You can confirm the registered DTMF code by the DTMF tones. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. The Set mode is selected. Sending the Registered DTMF Code 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 4 DTMF MODE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select MODE. 7 Turn the O knob to select AUTO. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The auto dialer is activated. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s 67 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the DTMF Function 10 While pressing the p switch, press your desired key (1 to 0). Using a keypad key, select the channel of the DTMF memory containing the DTMF code to be sent. Hints The registered DTMF code is sent. The sent DTMF tones are heard from the speaker. 11 Release the p switch. Even after the p switch is released, sending of the DTMF signal continues until it is completed. The Set mode is selected. Sending a DTMF Code Manually 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 4 DTMF MODE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select MANUAL. 7 Press the M key more than 1 second. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second again. Manual entry is enabled. 9 While pressing the p switch, press one of 1 to 0 keys. Using a keypad key, select the DTMF code to be sent. U s e f u l F u n c t i o n s Hints The DTMF code corresponding to the pressed key is sent. (See the table shown below.) The sent DTMF tones are heard from the speaker. 10 Release the p switch. Even after the p switch is released, sending of the DTMF signal continues until it is completed. Hint A DTMF code is a combination of two frequencies. 1209 Hz 1336 Hz 1477 Hz 1633 Hz 697 Hz 770 Hz 852 Hz 941 Hz 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9
#
A B C D 68 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Communicating with a Specific Remote Station Communicating with a Specific Remote Station Using the Tone Squelch Function The tone squelch opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified frequency tone is received. Use of the digital code squelch (DCS) opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. The tone squelch function blocks monitoring of communications between other stations even when waiting for call by a specific station for a long time. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 11 SQL TYPE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select a squelch type. Select a squelch type with reference to the table shown below. 7 Press the M key more than 1 second. The selected squelch type is determined. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode item 11 SQL TYPE is selected. The Set mode is canceled. Squelch type is displayed. The logo is displayed. Hints The tone squelch setting or the DCS setting is also effective for scanning. If scanning is performed with the tone squelch or the DCS function turned on, it stops only when a signal containing a tone of the specified frequency or a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. Pressing the Monitor switch allows you to hear signals that do not contain a tone or DCS code, the signal that does not contain the tone of the specified frequency, and the signal which does not contain the specified DCS code, Pressing the M key more than 1 second and changing the Set mode item allows you to use this function more conveniently. 4 SIGNALING 3 DCS INVERSION: Allows you to receive the DCS code of the inverted phase. 4 SIGNALING 10 SQL EXPANTION: Allows you to specify different squelch types for transmission and reception respectively. Display Operation OFF TONE TONE SQ DCS REV TONE Turns off the tone sending function, tone squelch function, etc. Just sends tones (TN is displayed). Turns on the tone squelch function (TSQ is displayed). Turns on the digital code squelch (DCS is displayed). Turns on the reverse tone function (RTN is displayed). Used to monitor communications based on the squelch control system in which a tone signal is contained when communication is not performed and the tone signal disappears when communication starts. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 69 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function Display Operation PAGER (See page 124) Turns on a new pager function (PAG is displayed). When using FT1DRs with your friends, specifying personal codes (each code is composed of two tones) allows only a specific station to be called. D CD*
Sends a DCS code only in case of transmission (DC is displayed). TONE-DCS*
D CD-TONE SQL*
Sends a tone signal in case of transmission, and waits for a DCS code in case of reception (T-D is displayed). Sends a DCS code in case of transmission, and waits for a tone signal in case of reception (D-T is displayed).
* Press the M key more than 1 second to select the Set mode and selecting 4 SIGNALING 10 SQL EXPANTION ON will add options D CD, TONE-DCS, and D CD TONESQL to the Set mode items 4 SIGNALING to 16 SQL TYPE, allowing you to select different types of squelches for transmission and reception. Selecting a Tone Frequency The Set mode is selected. You can select a tone frequency from among 50 frequencies (67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz)
(See page 181). 1 Specify the operating frequency. 2 Press the M key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 4 Press the M key briefly. 5 Turn the O knob to select 12 TONE SQL FREQ. 6 Press the M key briefly. 7 Turn the O knob to select a tone frequency. 8 Press the M key briefly. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second. The selected tone frequency is determined. The Set mode is canceled. Hints The tone frequency selected using the above-described procedure is also effective when only the tone is sent out. By default, the tone frequency is set to 88.5 Hz. 70 C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Searching for the Frequency of the Tone Squelch Used by the Remote Station Using the Tone Squelch Function The Set mode is selected. The frequency of the tone squelch used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 11 SQL TYPE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select TONE SQL. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Receive the signal from the remote station. 9 Press the B key more than 1 second. 10 Release the B key. Search for the tone frequency starts. TONE SEARCH is displayed. When a coincident frequency is detected, a beep is emitted and search stops temporarily. The detected tone frequency blinks. Hints To set the found tone frequency, use the following procedure:
Press the B key. A beep is emitted. Press the M key more than 1 second. Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Hint For the operation to perform when scanning stops, refer to Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops (See page 57). Selecting a DCS Code The Set mode is selected. You can select a DCS code from among 104 DCS codes (023 to 754) (See page 170). 1 Specify the operating frequency. 2 Press the M key more than 1 second. 3 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 4 Press the M key briefly. 5 Turn the O knob to select 2 DCS CODE. 6 Press the M key briefly. 7 Turn the O knob to select a DCS code. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 71 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. The selected DCS code is determined. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second. The Set mode is canceled. Hint By default, the DCS code is set to 023. Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station The Set mode is selected. The DCS code used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 11 SQL TYPE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select DCS. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Turn the O knob to select 2 DCS CODE. 9 Press the M key briefly. 10 Receive the signal from the remote station. 11 Press the B key more than about 1 second. 12 Release the B key. Search for the DCS code starts. The selected DCS is determined. DCS SEARCH is displayed. When a coincident DCS code is found, a beep is emitted and search stops C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n temporarily. The found DCS code blinks. Hints To set the found DCS code, use the following procedure:
Press the B key. A beep is emitted. Press the M key more than 1 second. Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Hint For the operation to perform when scan stops, refer to Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops (See page 57). 72 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Notification of Call from the Remote Station by Vibration of the Vibrator Using the Tone Squelch Function The Set mode is selected. Call from the remote station (reception of a signal containing a coincident tone or DCS) can be notified by the vibrator. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 7 CONFIG. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 22 VIBRATOR. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select MODE. 7 Turn the O knob to select SIGNALING. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the O key more than 1 second again. The vibrator function is activated. The Set mode is canceled. Hints To turn off the vibrator function, select OFF in step 6. Hints The vibrator function can be set for all frequency bands belonging to A- and B-bands. Selecting 7 CONFIG 23 VIBRATOR BUSY in the Set mode will cause the vibrator to start vibrating when the BUSY LED lights upon receipt of a signal. A solid line () is displayed under the mode indication on the LCD. If you operate a key while the vibrator is vibrating, the vibrator stops vibrating and enters the suspended state. In this case, the dashed line (----) or solid line () on the LCD blinks. If the BUSY state is not held continuously more than 5 seconds, the suspended state is canceled. If the p switch is operated to change the communication mode from transmission to reception when the vibrator is turned ON, the vibrator function is turned off for 5 seconds and the dashed line
(----) or solid line () on the LCD blinks. Selecting a Vibrator Operation Mode The Set mode is selected. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 7 CONFIG. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 22 VIBRATOR MODE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select SELECT. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 73 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function 7 Turn the O knob to select a vibrator operation mode. Remarks Default: MODE1 MODE1 The vibrator vibrates continuously. MODE2 The vibrator operates at long intervals. MODE3 The vibrator operates at short intervals. The selected vibrator mode is determined. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Notification of Call from a Remote Station by the Bell Bell Function C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n The Set mode is selected. Call from a remote station (reception of a signal containing a coincident tone or DCS) can be notified by the bell sound and the b icon blinking on the LCD. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 1 BELL. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select RINGER. 7 Turn the O knob to select BELL. When the tone squelch or DCS function is turned on, the b icon is displayed. The bell function is turned on. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Hint To turn off the bell function, select OFF in step 6. Hints To use the bell function, turn on the tone squelch or DCS function. The bell function cannot be used via the repeater. The b icon is displayed when the bell function is turned on. Upon receipt of a signal from a remote station, the b icon blinks. 74 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function Changing the Number of Times the Bell Rings The Set mode is selected. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 1 BELL. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select SELECT. 7 Turn the O knob to select a number of times the bell rings. Remarks Default: Once Hint You can select the number of times the bell rings from among 1-20 and continuous. The selected number of times the bell rings is determined. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function When using FT1DRs with your friends, specifying personal codes (each code is composed of two CTCSS codes) allows only a specific station to be called. Even if the called person is not near his or her FT1DR, the information on the LCD indicates that he or she has been called. A B C Well, call Mr. B. Intermittent t o n e Three persons A, B, and C Mr. C sends the personal Only Mr. B is called. are using the FT1DR code of Mr. B. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 75 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function Set the same code as that of the remote station. Determine a frequency. Perform transmission/reception. Confirm reception according to the information on the LCD and the bell sound Setting the Code of Your Station The Set mode is selected. Set the personal code (your code) used to be called by other stations. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 6 PAGER. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the A knob to select CODE-RX. 7 Turn the O knob to select a code. Select the first code from among 1-50. 8 Press the B key briefly. 9 Turn the O knob to select a code. Select the second code from among 1-50. The cursor moves. Precaution The second code must be different from the first code. 10 Press the M key more than 1 second. The code of your station is determined. 11 Press the M key more than 1 second again. Hints Default: 05 47 The first and second codes contained in your personal code may be inverted, i.e., 05 47 and 47 05 are recognized as being the same code. If the same personal code (group code) is specified for all persons, all persons can be called at the same time. 76 C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Using the Tone Squelch Function The Set mode is selected. Turning on the New Pager Function 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 11 SQL TYPE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select PAGER. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Press the M key more than 1 second. 9 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The new pager function is turned on. The Set mode is canceled. Thus, you can call or wait a remote station using the new pager function. Calling a Specific Station The Set mode is selected. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select 11 SQL TYPE. 5 Press the M key briefly. 6 Turn the O knob to select PAGER. 7 Press the M key briefly. 8 Turn the O knob to select 4 SIGNALING. 9 Press the M key briefly. 10 Turn the O knob to select 6 PAGER. 11 Press the M key briefly. 12 Turn the A knob to select CODE-TX. 13 Turn the O knob to select the code of the remote station. Select the first code of the remote station. The new pager function is selected. Precaution Register the pager code of the remote station in advance. The cursor moves. 14 Press the B key briefly. 15 Turn the O knob to select the code of the remote station. Select the second code of the remote station. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n PAG is displayed. 77 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. The code is determined. Using the Tone Squelch Function 16 Press the M key more than 1 second. 17 Press the M key more than 1 second again. 18 Press the p key. Call the remote station. The Set mode is canceled. Being Called by the Remote Station (Standby Operation) If you use the new pager function at the same frequency as that of the remote station, PAG displayed on the LCD changes to PIN, allowing you to check that you have been called by the remote station. In addition, if you turn on the bell function (See page 140), you can confirm call by the remote station by the PAG display, the blinking b icon, and the bell sound. In addition, if you turn on the vibrator function (See page 139), you can confirm call by the remote station by vibration of the vibrator. Hint Selecting 4 SIGNALING 9 PAGER ANS-BACK ON in the Set mode places the FT1DR in the transmission state (for about 2.5 seconds) automatically when called by the remote party and notifies the remote party of getting ready for communication. C o m m u n c a i t i n g w i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 78 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Functions Used As Needed Functions Used As Needed Set Mode Selecting Set Mode Items The Set mode allows you to select various functions from lists so that you can use your FT1DR more conveniently. 1 Press the M key more than 1 second. 2 Turn the O knob to select a Set mode The Set mode is selected. Set mode item No. Set mode item item. 3 Press the M key briefly. 4 Turn the O knob to select an option. Select an option. 5 Press the M key more than 1 second. 6 Press the M key more than 1 second again. The Set mode is canceled. Resetting the Set Mode Items The Set mode items you have set can be restored to the defaults by following the procedure described below. However, to restore the following items to the defaults, all resetting (See page 15) is required. Set mode item 7 BANK NAME 16 CW ID 22 DCS INVERSION 29 EMERGENCY SELECT 38 INTERNET CODE 48 MENORY FAST STEP 51 MENORY SKIP 63 PAGER CODE-RX 71 RPT SHIFT 90 SQL TYPE APRSR/GPS Set mode items 5 APRS MSG TXT 16 DIGI PATH 22 MY CALLSIGN 24 MY SYMBOL 15 CLOCK SHIFT 21 DCS CODE 25 DTMF SELECT 33 HALF DEVIATION 41 INTERNET SELECT 49 MENORY NAME 55 MESSAGE SELECT 64 PAGER CODE-TX 72 RPT SHIFT FREQ 93 TONE FREQUENCY 13 BEACON STATS TXT 21 MSG GROUP 23 MY POSITION F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 79 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set Mode 1 While pressing the % and V keys, press the P key. 2 When SET MODE RESET PUSH F KEY is displayed, press the F key. A beep is emitted. The FT1DR is turned on. When a beep is heard, release the keys. Hints To cancel resetting, press any key other than the F key. Set Mode Item List Set mode item No./Item Description of function Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 1 DISPLAY 1-1 DISPLAY SELECT 1-2 BAND SCOPE 1-3 LAMP 1-4 LANGUAGE 1-5 LCD CONTRAST 1-6 LCD DIMMER 1-7 OPENING MESSAGE 1-8 SENSOR INFO 1-9 S-METER SYNBOL 2 TX / RX 2-1 MODE GPS ON / GPS OFF ONCE / CONTINUOUS / FULL TIME OFF / 2-10 SEC(KEY) /
CONTINUOUS JAPANESE / ENGLISH Display/hide the GPS screen each time the M key is pressed briefly. Select a spectrum analyzer operation mode. Set the time during which the backlight and keys stay lit. Select Japanese or English as the display language for Set mode items, options, etc. Set the LCD contrast level. Set the brightness level of the LCD backlight and keypad key light. Select an opening message type. NORMAL / OFF / DC /
LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 15 LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 6 Voltage/temperature display function Select a S/PO meter symbol display type. MESSAGE / CALLSIGN VOLTAGE & TEMPERATURE 4 types 2-1-1 ANTENNA AM Select an AM radio antenna type. BAR & EXT. ANTEANN/BAR Turn on/off the attenuator. Turn on/off the full duplex function. Set the transmission modulation level. Select a reception mode. ANTENNA OFF / ON OFF / ON OFF / ON AUTO / NFM / AM T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. 2-1-2 ANTENNA ATT 2-1-3 FULL DUPLEX 2-1-4 HALF DEVIATION 2-1-5 RX MODE 2-2 DIGITAL 2-2-1 DIGITAL MODE 2-2-2 SQL TYPE 2-2-3 MY CALLSIGN SEL 2-2-4 MY CALLSIGN 2-2-5 DISTINATION 2-2-6 TEXT 80 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set mode item No./Item Description of function Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page Set Mode 2-2-7 DSP Ver 2-3 AUDIO 2-3-1 MIC GAIN 2-3-2 MUTE 2-3-3 RX AF DUAL 2-3-4 VOL MODE 3 MEMORY 3-1 BANK LINK 3-2 BANK NAME 3-3 MEMORY NAME 3-4 MEMORY PROTECT 3-5 MEMORY SKIP 3-6 MEMORY WRITE 4 SIGNALING 4-1 BELL 4-2 DCS CODE 4-3 DCS INVERSION T.B.D. T.B.D. Adjust the microphone level. Set the muting level on the non-
operating side when a signal is received on the operating band side. Select a mode for simultaneous reception of a radio broadcast. LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 9 OFF / MUTE 30% /
MUTE 50% / MUTE 100%
1-SEC COMMUNICATION to 10-SEC COMMUNICATION/
FIXED / 1-SEC TRANSMISSION to 10-SEC TRANSMISSION Select a v key function. NORMAL / AUTO BACK Set up a memory bank. BANK 1 to BANK 24, BANK LINK ON / OFF BANK 1 to BANK 24 Assign a name to a memory bank. Write a memory tag. Enable/disable writing into the memory. Assign a skip/selected memory. OFF / SKIP / SELECT Select an auto increment mode for memory writing. Max. 16 characters OFF / ON NEXT / LOWER Set up the bell function. Select a DCS code Select a combination of DCS inversion codes in terms of communication direction. RINGER: OFF / BELL SELECT: ONCE to 20 TIMES/
CONTINUOUS DCS 023 to DCS 754 RECEPTION IN-PHASE, TRANSMISSION IN-PHASE RECEPTION INVERTED PHASE, TRANSMISSION IN-PHASE RECEPTION BOTH-PHASE, TRANSMISSION IN-PHASE RECEPTION IN-PHASE, TRANSMISSION INVERTED PHASE RECEPTION INVERTED PHASE, TRANSMISSION INVERTED PHASE RECEPTION BOTH-PHASE, TRANSMISSION INVERTED PHASE F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 81 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set Mode Set mode item No./Item Description of function Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page MODE: MANUAL / AUTO DELAY: 50ms / 250ms / 450ms /
1 to 10 750ms / 1000ms SPEED: 50ms / 100ms Select a DTMF memory sending mode. Select a DTMF sending delay time. Select a DTMF sending time. Select a DTMF auto dialer channel or code (16 characters). Turn on/off the pager answerback function and specify a personal code (transmission/reception). Select a no-communication squelch frequency. Select a squelch level. Select an S-meter squelch level. OFF/LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 9 Enable or disable selection of different squelch types for transmission and reception. Select a squelch type. ANS-BACK: OFF / ON CODE-RX: 01 02 to 50 49 CODE-TX: 01 02 to 50 49 300 Hz to 3000 Hz LEVEL 0 to LEVEL 15 OFF / ON Select a tone frequency. Enable or disable emission of tone during tone search. Turn on/off the muting function and select a tone search speed. Select a priority channel monitoring interval. Turn the lamp on/off when scanning stops. Set a scanning restart time. Select a scanning stop mode. OFF / TONE / TONE SQL / DCS /
REV TONE / JR FREQ /
PR FREQ / PAGER 67.0Hz to 254.1Hz MUTE: ON / OFF SPEED: HIGH / LOW 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC ON / OFF 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC BUSY / HOLD / 2 SEC to 10 SEC 4-4 DTMF MODE 4-5 DTMF SELECT 4-6 PAGER 4-7 PR FREQUENCY 4-8 SQL LEVEL 4-9 SQL S-METER 4-10 SQL EXPANTION 4-11 SQL TYPE 4-12 TONE SQL FREQ 4-13 TONE-SRCH 5 SCAN 5-1 PRI TIME 5-2 SCAN LAMP 5-3 SCAN RE-START 5-4 SCAN RESUME 6 ARTS / WiRES 6-1 WiRES MANU/AUTO 6-2 WiRES CODE 6-3 WiRES KEY 6-4 WiRES MODE F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. T.B.D. 6-5 WiRES SELECT
* For more details on functions, refer to the included CD-ROM. Set the APO operating time. Turn on the busy channel lockout function. OFF / 30 MIN /1 HOUR 00 MIN to 12 HOURS 00 MIN OFF / ON 7 CONFIG 7-1 APO 7-2 BCLO 82 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set mode item No./Item Description of function Set up the beep output function and the function of emitting a beep when a band edge/CH1 is encountered. Turn on/off the BUSY LED Set Mode Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page SELECT:
KEY&SCAN / KEY / OFF EDGE: OFF / ON Select a clock type. Set the duration of GPS access. OFF / 1 SEC / 2 SEC / 5 SEC /
7-3 BEEP 7-4 BUSY LED 7-5 CLOCK TYPE 7-6 GPS LOG 7-7 HOME VFO 7-8 LED LIGHT 7-9 LOCK 7-10 MONI/T-CALL 7-11 TIMER 7-12 PASSWORD 7-13 PTT DELAY 7-14 RPT ARS 7-15 RPT SHIFT 7-16 RPT SHIFT FREQ 7-17 SAVE RX 7-18 STEP 7-19 DATE & TIME ADJ 7-20 TOT 7-21 VFO MODE 7-22 VIBRATOR 8 APRS 8-1 APRS AF DUAL Enable/disable VFO transfer via the home channel. Turn on/off the white LED flashlight. Select a lock mode. Select a monitor switch or T-CALL switch. Set the power ON/OFF timer. Turn on/off the password function. Set the PTT delay time. A BAND: ON / OFF B BAND: ON / OFF RADIO: ON / OFF A / B 10 SEC / 30 SEC / 60 SEC ENABLE / DISABLE WHITE LED ON KEY&DIAL / PTT / KEY&PTT /
DIAL&PTT / ALL / KEY / DIAL MONI / T-CALL ON: 00:00 to 23:59 ON / OFF OFF: 00:00 to 23:59 ON / OFF ON / OFF [ ]
OFF / 20ms / 50ms / 100ms /
200ms ON / OFF 0.000 MHz to 150.000 MHz OFF / 0.2 SEC (1:1) to 60.0 SEC
(1:300) AUTO / 5.0KHZ to 100KHz OFF / 30 SEC to 10 MIN 00 SEC ALL / BAND MODE:
OFF / BUSY / SIGNALING SELECT:
MODE1 / MODE2 / MODE3 Turn on/off the ARS function. Select a repeater shift direction. SIMPLEX / RPT / +RPT Select a repeater shift width. Set the reception save time. Select a channel step. Set up the built-in clock function. Set the timeout timer. Select the frequency selection range in the VFO mode. Select a vibrator mode and set up the vibrator function. Turn on/off the muting function when both the APRS function and AF dual function are active. ON / OFF F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 83 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set Mode Set mode item No./Item Description of function 8-2 APRS FILTER Select a filter function. 8-3 APRS MODEM 8-4 APRS MUTE 8-5 APRS POPUP Select an APRS baud rate. Turn on/off the B-band AF muting function when APRS is set. Select a pop-up beacon type. Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: OFF / ON ALTNET: ON / OFF OFF / 1200bps / 9600bps ON / OFF Mic-E:
OFF / ALL 2s to ALL 60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT POSITION:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT WEATHER:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT OBJECT:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ITEM:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT STATUS:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT OTHER:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT 8-5 APRS POPUP Select a pop-up beacon type. MY PACKET:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 84 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set mode item No./Item Description of function 8-6 APRS RINGER Turn on/off the bell when a beacon is received. Set Mode Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: ON / OFF MY PACKET: ON / OFF 8-7 APRS UNIT Select the units for APRS display. Position: MM.MM' / MM'SS'
Distance: km / mile Speed: km/h / knot / mph Altitude: m / ft Temp: C / F Rain: mm / inch Wind: m/s / mph 8-8 APRS TX DELAY 8-9 BEACON INFO Set the data sending delay time. 100ms / 150ms / 200ms /
250ms / 300ms / 400ms /
500ms / 750ms / 1000ms AMBIGUITY:
T.B.D. 8-10 BEACON INTERVAL Set a beacon automatic sending interval. 8-11 BEACON STATS TXT Make settings for status text entry. 8-12 BEACON TX 8-13 COM PORT SETTING Select automatic or manual sending of beacon. Set up the COM port. 8-14 DIGI PASS Select a digipeater route. 8-15 GPS DATUM Select a datum used for the GPS function. 8-16 GPS POWER 8-17 GPS TIME SET Turn on/off the GPS function. Turn on/off the GPS time and date automatic acquisition function. OFF / 1 dig to 4 dig SPD / CSE: ON / OFF ALTITUDE: ON / OFF 30sec / 1min / 2min / 3min /
5min / 10min / 15min / 20min /
30min / 60min S.TXT: ON / OFF TX RATE: 1/1 to 1/8 1 to 5 CH AUTO / MANUAL STATUS: ON / OFF SPEED:
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 INPUT: OFF / GPS P1 OFF P2 1 WIDE1-1 P3 1 WIDE1-1 / 2 WIDE2-1 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 WGS-84 / Tokyo Mean /
Tokyo Japan / Tokyo Korea /
Tokyo Okinawa GPS ON / GPS OFF AUTO / MANUAL F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 85 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Set Mode Set mode item No./Item Description of function Option Reference
(Bold letters: Default) page 8-18 GPS UNIT Select the units for GPS display. Position: .MMM' / 'SS''
8-19 MY CALLSIGN 8-20 MY POSITION Specify the call sign of your station. Set the location of your station. 8-21 MY SYMBOL 8-22 POSITION COMMENT Set the symbol of your station. Set up the position comment function. 8-23 SmartBeaconing Set up the smart beaconing function. Speed: Km/h / Knot / mph Altitude: m / ft GPS / Lat N * ****.**' /
P1 to P10 64 Icon Off Duty / En Route / In Service /
Returning / Committed / Special /
Priority / Custom 0 to 6 /
EMERGENCY!
STATUS:
OFF / TYPE1 / TYPE2 / TYPE3 LOW SPD: 2Km/h to 30Km/h HIGH SPD: 31Km/h to 70Km/h SLOW RATE: 1min to 100min FAST RATE: 10sec to 180sec TURN ANGL: 5 to 90 TURN SLOP: 1 to 255 TURN TIME: 5sec to 180sec UTC 13.0 H 8-24 TIME ZONE
* For more details of functions, refer to the included CD-ROM. Set the time zone. 9 SD CARD 9-1 FORMAT 9-2 STORE/RECALL Initialize the micro SD memory card. Write or read the information about your FT1DR into or from the micro SD memory card. Format the micro SD memory card. STORE: Copy the information about your FT1DR to the micro SD memory card. RECALL: Read data from the micro SD memory card and write it over the existing information about your FT1DR. 10 OPTION 10-1 MH-85 T.B.D. T.B.D. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 86 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. FT1DR Specifications General Frequency Range:
RX:
TX:
Channel Steps:
Mode of Emission:
Antenna Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
0.5 - 1.8 MHz, 1.8 - 30 MHz, 30 - 76 MHz, 76 - 108 MHz, 108 - 137 MHz, 137 - 174 MHz, 174 - 222 MHz, 222 - 420 MHz, 420 - 470 MHz, 800 - 999 MHz (Cellular Blocked) 144 - 148 MHz, 430 - 450 MHz 5/6.25/8.33/9/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz F1D, F2D, F3E, F7W 50 , unbalanced 2.5 ppm (10 C to +50 C) Operating Temperature Range: 20 C to +60 C Supply Voltage:
7.4 V DC (Rated), 4 - 9 V DC (Battery Input), 11 - 16 V DC (EXT DC Input) Current Consumption (Approx.):
RX:
TX:
Case Size (W H D):
Weight (Approx.):
Transmitter Output Power:
Modulation Type:
Maximum Deviation:
Spurious Radiation:
250 mA (Analog / Mono Band) 350 mA (Digital / Mono Band) 1.7 A (144 MHz / Analog) 1.8 A (144 MHz / Digital) 2.0 A (430 MHz / Analog) 2.1 A (430 MHz / Digital) 60(W) 95(H) 28(D) mm (w/o knobs & antenna) 250g (with Battery & Antenna) 5 W (144 / 430 MHz), 2.5 W (144 / 430MHz) 1.0 W (144 / 430 MHz), 0.1 W (144 / 430MHz) Variable Reactance 5 KHz, better than 60 dB Modulation Distortion:
Microphone Impedance:
less than 3%
2 k Receiver Circuit Type:
Intermediate Frequency:
Double-conversion super heterodyne (N-FM / AM) 1st: A- Band 47.25 MHz (N-FM / AM) 1st: B- Band 46.35 MHz (N-FM / AM) 2nd: 450 kHz (N-FM / AM) F T 1 D R S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 87 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. FT1DR Specifications Sensitivity (for 12dB SINAD):
0.5 - 30 MHz: 3.00 V (10 dB S/N, AM) 30 - 54 MHz: 0.35 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 54 - 76 MHz: 1.00 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 76 - 108 MHz: 1.50 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 108 - 137 MHz: 1.50 V (10 dB S/N, AM) 137 - 140 MHz: 0.20 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 140 - 150 MHz: 0.16 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 150 - 174 MHz: 0.20 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 174 - 222 MHz: 1.00 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 300 - 350 MHz: 0.50 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 350 - 400 MHz: 0.20 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 400 - 470 MHz: 0.18 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 470 - 540 MHz: 1.50 V (12 dB SINAD, W-FM) 540 - 800 MHz: 3.00 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM) 800 - 999 MHz: 1.50 V (12 dB SINAD, N-FM)
(USA Version Cellular Blocked) Selectivity (6dB/60dB):
15 kHz / 35 kHz (N-FM/AM) Maximum AF Output:
AF Output Impedance:
400 mW @ 13.8V, 10% THD 200 mW @ 7.4V, 10% THD 8 F T 1 D R S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 88 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. 1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. 2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. Part 15.21: Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user. WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW. 89 FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Copyright 2012 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Printed in Japan FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
1 2 3 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.69 MiB |
Operating Manual 144/430MHz DIGITAL/ANALOG TRANSCEIVER C4FM FDMA Read this information first Basic Operation Repeater Operation Using the Memory Scanning Function Using the Digital GM Function Using the APRS Function Using the GPS Function Convenient Functions Communicating with a Specific Remote Station Functions Used As Needed Appendix Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Read this information first Table of Contents Read this information first ....................................... 2 Introduction ................................................................. 5 How to Read This Manual ...................................... 6 Checking Bundled Items ........................................ 6 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) ....................... 7 Before Transmitting Radio Waves .............................11 Names and Functions of Controls ............................ 12 Preparation ............................................................... 15 Installing the Antenna........................................... 15 Attaching the Accessory Belt Clip/Protective Cap ... 15 Attaching the Protective Cap ........................... 15 Attaching the Belt Clip ..................................... 15 Basic Operation ...................................................... 15 Attaching a Hand Strap ........................................ 16 How to Use the Battery Case (FBA-39) Optional ... 16 Installing/Removing the Battery Pack .................. 17 Installing the Battery Pack ............................... 17 Removing the Battery Pack ............................. 17 Charging the Battery Pack ................................... 17 Connecting an External Power Supply for Use in Vehicle (USA/EXP version only) ... 20 Connecting to an External Power Supply Using a Power Cable (USA/EXP version only) ... 20 Using a microSD memory card................................. 22 Usable microSD memory cards ........................... 22 Cautions when using a micro SD memory card ... 22 Mounting and dismounting microSD memory card ... 22 Formatting a microSD memory card .................... 24 Performing Communication ...................................... 25 Turning on the Transceiver .................................. 25 Adjusting the Volume Level.................................. 26 Selecting an Operating Band ............................... 27 Selecting a Frequency Band ................................ 29 Tuning in to a Frequency ..................................... 30 Selecting Communication Mode .......................... 30 Performing Communication ................................. 31 Selecting Communication Mode .......................... 32 Listening to the Radio ............................................... 33 Listening to the AM/FM Radio .............................. 33 Switching between AM Antennas ......................... 33 Miscellaneous Settings ............................................. 34 Setting clock time ................................................. 34 Setting the Time Signal ........................................ 34 Muting Audio ........................................................ 35 Changing the Transmission Power Level............. 36 Adjusting the Squelch Level................................. 37 Changing the Frequency Step Manually .............. 37 Changing the Mode Manually .............................. 38 Locking keys and switches .................................. 39 Restoring to Defaults (All Reset).......................... 39 Repeater Operation .................................................. 40 Communicating Via the Repeater ........................ 40 Tone Calling (1750 Hz) ........................................ 40 Repeater Operation ................................................ 40 Repeater Shift........................................................... 41 Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS) .......................... 41 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions ........................ 42 Using the Memory .................................................. 42 Registering to Memory Channel .......................... 43 Split Memory ........................................................ 44 Recalling a Memory Channel ............................... 44 Recalling Home Channel ..................................... 45 Returning to the Previous Frequency .............. 45 Deleting Memory Channel ................................... 46 Restoring Deleted Memory Channel ............... 46 Using Memory Tag ............................................... 46 Assigning a Name to a Memory Channel ........ 47 Displaying Memory Tag ................................... 47 Using Memory Bank ................................................. 48 Registering a Memory Channel in a Memory Bank ... 48 Recalling Memory Bank ....................................... 49 Canceling Memory Channel Registration in Memory Bank ....................................................... 49 Assigning Name to Memory Bank........................ 49 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels....... 51 Registering Your Favorite Preset Receiver Memory Channels in Memory Bank ... 51 Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the Weather Broadcast ... 51 Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the International VHF (Marine) Radio.... 52 Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the World Broadcast ... 54 Worldwide short wave broadcast .................... 54 Using the Scanning Function.................................... 56 VFO Scan ............................................................ 56 Scanning Function ................................................. 56 Canceling Scanning ........................................ 57 Skipping a Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan (Skip Search Memory) ... 57 Specifying the Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan ... 58 Deleting a Frequency Registered to the Skip Search Memory Channel ... 58 Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops ... 59 Memory Channel Scanning.................................. 59 Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel ... 60 Scanning Only the Selected Memory Channel ... 61 Scanning a Memory Bank .................................... 61 Memory Bank Link Scan ................................. 62 Programmable Memory Channel Scan (PMS)..... 63 Registering to a Programmable Memory Channel ... 63 Performing Programmable Memory Channel Scan ... 64 2 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Digital GM Function
(Digital Group Monitor Function) ............... 65 What is the GM function? ......................................... 65 Standard Operation of the GM Function................... 65 Using the GM Function ........................................ 65 Using the APRS Function ...................................... 67 What is the APRS
(Automatic Packet Reporting System)?.... 67 Using the GPS Function ........................................ 68 What is GPS? ........................................................... 68 Activating the GPS Function..................................... 68 Method of Positioning by GPS.................................. 69 Displaying Current Position Information of Your Station... 69 Displaying Position Information of Remote Station in Digital Mode ... 69 Saving GPS Information (GPS Log Function)...... 71 Checking Tracks on a PC .................................... 71 Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation .............. 72 Smart Navigation Function ....................................... 73 Using the Smart Navigation Function .................. 73 Description of the BACK TRACK Function Screen... 74 Dual Reception (DW) Function ................................. 75 VFO Dual Reception VFO mode Priority memory channel ... 75 Convenient Functions ............................................ 75 Memory Channel Dual Reception Memory channel Priority memory channel ...76 Home Channel Dual Reception Home channel Priority memory channel ...76 AF-DUAL Function for simultaneous signal reception over the other frequency while listening to the radio... 77 Using the DTMF Function......................................... 79 Confirming the entered DTMF code by the sound ... 80 Sending the Registered DTMF Code ................... 80 Sending a DTMF Code Manually ......................... 81 Searching for signals with the signal strength graph. Band Scope Function ... 82 Taking picture with the optional camera mounted on speaker microphone ... 82 Using the Tone Squelch Function ............................. 84 Communicating with a Specific Remote Station ... 84 Selecting a Tone Frequency ............................ 85 Searching for the Frequency of the Tone Squelch Used by the Remote Station ......... 86 Selecting a DCS Code .................................... 86 Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station ... 87 Notification of Call from the Remote Station by Vibration of the Vibrator ... 88 Selecting Vibrator Operation Mode ................. 88 Table of Contents Notification of a Call from a Remote Station by the Bell ... 89 Changing the Number of Times the Bell Rings ... 89 Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function ... 90 Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function ... 90 Setting the Code of Your Station ..................... 91 Turning on the New Pager Function ................ 91 Calling a Specific Station ................................ 92 Being Called by the Remote Station
(Standby Operation) ... 93 Set Mode .................................................................. 94 Using the Set Mode ............................................. 94 Resetting the Set Mode Options ..................... 94 Functions Used As Needed ................................... 94 Set Mode Option List ........................................... 95 Displaying the GPS screen. .............................. 103 Setting the display method of the remote station information ... 104 Setting the display method for BACKTRACK .... 104 Setting the search channels for the BAND SCOPE function ... 105 Changing the Lighting Condition ........................ 105 Selecting a Display Language ........................... 106 Adjusting the LCD Contrast Level ...................... 106 Adjusting the LCD Backlight and Keypad Key Light Brightness Level ... 107 Changing the Opening Message Displayed Immediately after Power-on ... 107 Measuring the Battery Voltage and the Transceiver Temperature Power Supply Voltage Measurement Function/Temperature Measurement Function ... 108 Changing the Display Pattern of the PO Meter ... 109 Switching between AM Antennas ....................... 109 Reducing receiver sensitivity Attenuator
(ATT) Function ... 109 Setting the transmission modulation level...........110 Changing the mode manually .............................111 Switching between digital and analog mode .......111 Setting the AMS transmission mode ...................112 Setting the squelch type for the digital mode ......113 Setting the pop up time of the remote station information ...113 Setting the Standby Beep ...................................114 Displaying the version of the DSP program ........115 Adjusting the microphone sensitivity Microphone Gain...115 Muting Voice .......................................................116 Simultaneously radio broadcast reception ..........116 Changing the sound volume setting method ......116 Setting memory bank link....................................117 Assigning a name to a memory bank..................117 Assigning a name to a memory channel .............117 Prohibiting registration to memory channel Memory Channel Protect Function .....................118 3 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Setting the range for repeater shift RPT SHIFT FREQ Function ... 135 Disabling reception while no signal is received Reception Save Function ... 136 Changing the frequency step manually ............. 136 Setting clock time ............................................... 136 Restricting the continuous transmission time TOT Function ... 136 Setting the frequency selection range for operation in the VFO mode VFO MODE Function ... 137 Notification of a call from a remote station by vibration... 138 Saving/ Loading data to/from microSD memory card ... 138 Saving/ Loading memory channel information to/from microSD memory card ... 138 Saving/ Loading GROUP ID information to/from microSD memory card ... 139 Formatting a microSD memory card .................. 140 Setting the optional microphone with camera for use ... 140 Registering CALLSIGN ...................................... 141 Using the transceiver for packet communication ... 142 Clone Operation ................................................. 143 Connecting an external device........................... 144 Connecting to a PC ....................................... 144 Connecting the FT1XDR/DE to external devices . 145 Data Cable (CT-170) ..................................... 145 Data Cable (2.5) (CT-176) .......................... 145 Optional Parts ......................................................... 146 Appendix ............................................................... 146 If you suspect malfunction Check the following items before requesting for repair. . 147 The transceiver does not turn on. ................ 147 There is no sound ......................................... 147 There is no transmission of radio waves. ..... 147 The keys or O does not respond. .............. 147 The battery pack cannot be charged or battery power depletes immediately after charging. . 148 Index ....................................................................... 149 Specifications ......................................................... 152 Table of Contents Setting memory skip function ..............................118 Registering to a memory channel with the lowest memory channel number Memory Channel Write Function ...118 Notifying a call from a remote station by the bell ...119 Selecting a DCS code .........................................119 Transmit and receive a DCS Code with a inverted phase DCS INVERSION Function ...119 Setting the transmission method of the DTMF code ... 120 Setting DTMF code ............................................ 120 Calling only a specific station New Pager Function ... 120 Enabling no-communication squelch function PR FREQUENCY Function ... 120 Adjusting the squelch level SQL LEVEL Function ... 121 Setting the signal strength to output sound S Meter Squelch Function... 121 Setting the squelch type for transmission and reception SQL EXPANTION FUNCTION ... 122 Setting the type of tone squelch ........................ 123 Selecting a tone frequency ................................ 123 Setting the sound and speed during tone search Tone Search Function ... 123 ON/OFF for the Weather Alert Feature .............. 124 Setting the surveillance interval time for priority channels DW TIME Function ... 124 Turning illumination off when scanning stops SCAN LAMP Function ... 125 Setting the time to resume scan SCAN RE-START Function... 125 Selecting a reception method when scanning stops ... 126 Setting the range for SCAN ............................... 126 Turning off the power automatically APO Function ... 127 Preventing accidental transmission Busy Channel Lockout (BCLO) Function ... 128 Muting the key operation confirmation tone ....... 128 Turning off the BUSY Indicator .......................... 129 Setting the clock shift for the micro computer Clock Type Function ... 129 Setting interval to save GPS position information ... 130 Permitting Transfer of Home Channel Frequency to VFO ... 130 Using the White LED as a Flashlight ................. 131 Setting the conditions for locking LOCK Function ... 131 Setting the operation of T .............................. 132 Turning on/off the transceiver at the specified time Timer Function ... 132 Password Function ............................................ 133 Setting the PTT delay time PTT DELAY Function ... 134 Setting the ARS function RPT ARS Function ..... 134 Setting the direction for repeater shift RPT SHIFT Function ... 135 4 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Introduction Features of the FT1XDR/DE m Digital communication (C4FM (Quaternary FSK), FDMA system) ............................. 31 m Equipped with AMS (Automatic Mode Select) Function ............................................. 32 Automatically selects between 4 modes of transmission to fit the signal being received. m External power supply connection ............................................................................. 20 m Simultaneous reception on two different bands, or within the same band (V+V/U+U)
................................................................................................................................... 28 m Independent switching keys for A-band and B-band and TX/BUSY display .............. 28 m Wide-band reception over the range of 500 kHz to 999.900MHz .............................. 28 m Waterproof design conforming to IPX5 equivalent, which protects the transceiver from rain and splashes ............................................................................................... 11 m Individual side keys, full keyboard for easy character entry, tilted main dials ............ 12 m Easy-to-see dot matrix display ................................................................................... 14 m WIRES-X connection support ..................................See WIRES-X instruction manual*
m Equipped with GM function ..................................See GM function instruction manual*
m Large-capacity 1266ch memory, with twenty-four 100ch memory banks .................. 42 m Display memory tags comprised of up to 16 one-byte characters ............................. 46 m Convenient reception of preset receiver memory channels ....................................... 51 By selecting preset frequencies, you can receive shortwave broadcast, and international VHF radio stations with ease. m A wide variety of scan functions ................................................................................. 56 m Built-in GPS unit allowing display of your current location and heading information ................................................................................................................. 68 m Ready for APRS communication using the world standard 1200/ 9600bps AX25 modem (B band only) ................................................... See APRS instruction manual.*
m High-resolution band scope function to display 50 channels .................................. 82 m A variety of individual selective calling functions; such as tone squelch (CTCSS) and DCS functions ..................................................................................................... 84 m Vibrator to alert you of signal reception, in addition to the audible bell ...................... 88 m New pager function for calling only specific stations .................................................. 90 m Illumination by white LED for easy viewing of the LCD outdoors ............................. 131 m Built-in temperature sensor ...................................................................................... 108 m Battery save function to prolong the operating time of the battery ........................... 136 m Data terminal for communication with external equipment or firmware update ....... 144 m Built-in bar antenna for AM reception ......................................................................... 33 m Micro SD memory card slot ........................................................................................ 22 m Snapshot function (an optional camera microphone MH-85A11U is required) .......... 82
* WIRES-X, GM function and APRS instruction manuals are not included in the product package. They are available and may be downloaded from the Yaesu.com website. 5 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Introduction How to Read This Manual Typical explanatory expressions used in this manual are as follows:
For pressing the B key short .........Press B. For pressing the B key long ...........Press and hold B for over 1 second. For pressingFB .......................Press F and then B. For pressing or turning v while pressing the O key .....Turn v while pressing O. Caution
...Explains caution to observe during operation. Tip
...Explains operating suggestions or useful tips. Checking Bundled Items FT1XDR/DE Antenna Lithium-ion battery pack
(SBR-14LI: 7.2 V, 2,200 mAh) Belt clip PC connection cable
(SCU-19) Battery charger PA-48B/C/U* or SAD-11B
* B suffix is for use with 120 VAC
(Type-A plug), C suffix is for use with 230-240 VAC (Type-C plug), and U suffix is for use with 230 VAC (Type-BF plug). Card clip Protective plate for battery pack Quick Manual Warranty Card Instruction Manual
(this manual) Cautions Check that the name of the shop dealer from which you purchased the product and the date of purchase are indicated on the warranty card. If any item is missing, contact the shop dealer from which you purchased the product. 6 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Be sure to read the safety precautions to use this product safely. We are not liable for failures and other problems caused due to misuse or use of this product by you or a third party as well as the damages caused through use of this product by you or a third party except in the case where we are ordered to pay for damages under the laws. Types and Meanings of Symbols DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. avoided, could result in death or serious injury. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or only prop-
erty damage. CAUTION Types and Meanings of Legends Indicates a prohibited action, not to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, Indicates a required action, to be done in order to use this product safely. For example, indicates that the product should not be disassembled. indicates that the power plug should be removed. DANGER Do not use this product in an area where use of it is prohibited, e.g., in-
side the hospital, airplane, or train. This product can affect electronic or medical devices. Do not use this product while riding a bicycle or driving a car. Accidents can result. Be sure to stop the bicycle or car at a safe place before using this product. Those who are carrying a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker should not perform transmission near the device. When transmitting, use an external antenna and keep as far as possible away from the exter-
nal antenna. The radio wave emitted by the transmit-
ter can cause the medical device to mal-
function and result in an accident. Do not use this product or the battery charger in a place where inflammable gas is generated. A fire or explosion can occur. 7 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.06 MiB |
Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Do not perform transmission in a crowded place for the safety of per-
sons using a medical device such as a cardiac pacemaker. The radio wave emitted from this prod-
uct can cause the medical device to mal-
function and result in an accident. leak-
Do not touch any material ing from the battery pack with bare hands. The chemical that has stuck to your skin or entered your eye can cause chemical burns. In such a case, consult the doctor immediately. Do not solder or short-circuit the ter-
minal of the battery pack. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or igni-
tion can result. Do not carry the battery pack together with a necklace, hair pin, or small metal objects. A short circuit can result. If it starts thundering when the exter-
nal antenna is used, immediately turn off this product and disconnect the external antenna from it. A fire, electrical shock, or damage may result. WARNING Do not power this transceiver with a voltage other than the specified pow-
er supply voltage. A fire, electric shock, or damage may result. Do not use the battery pack for any model other than the specified trans-
ceiver. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. This product has a waterproof struc-
ture and conforms to IPX5 when the included antenna and battery pack are installed and rubber caps are securely attached to the MIC/SP jack, EXTDC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot. If this transceiver gets wet, wipe it with a dry cloth, etc. do not leave it exposed to the mois-
ture. Leaving this product in a wet condition can degrade its performance, shorten its life, or cause a failure or electrical shock. Do not make very long transmissions. The main body of the transceiver may overheat, resulting in a failure or burns. Do not disassemble or make any al-
teration to this product. An injury, electric shock, or failure can result. Do not handle the battery pack or charger with wet hands. Do not insert or remove the power plug with wet hands. An injury, leak, fire, or failure can result. If smoke or strange odor is emitted from the main body, battery pack, or battery charger, immediately turn the transceiver off; remove the bat-
tery pack, and remove the power plug from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, damage, igni-
tion, or failure can result. Contact the dealer from which you purchased this product or Yaesu Amateur Customer Support. Do not use the battery pack which is externally damaged or deformed. A fire, leak, heating, explosion, or igni-
tion can result. Do not use any battery charger which is not specified by Yaesu. A fire or failure can result. 8 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Keep the terminals of the battery pack clean. If terminal contacts are dirty or corroded, a fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) If charging of the battery pack can-
not be completed within the specified charging time, immediately remove the power plug of the battery charger from the outlet. A fire, leak, overheating, explosion, or ignition can result. CAUTION Do not dangle or throw this product by holding its antenna. This product can hit and injure some-
one. In addition, doing so can result in a transceiver failure or damage. Do not use transceiver in a crowded place. The antenna can hit someone, resulting in a injury. Do not place this transceiver in a place subject to direct sunlight or near a heater. The transceiver can deform or discolor. Do not place this transceiver in a hu-
mid or dusty place. A fire or failure can result. During transmission, keep the anten-
na as far from you as possible. Long-time exposure to electromagnetic waves can have a negative impact on your health. Do not clean the case with thinner or benzene. Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the case. If you do not use this transceiver for a long period, turn it off and remove the battery pack for safety. Do not drop, strike, or throw the transceiver. A failure or damage may result. Keep magnetic cards and video tape away from the transceiver. The data recorded on cash cards or video tape can be erased. Do not use the earpiece microphone, earphones, or headphones at an ex-
tremely high volume level. Hearing impairment can result. Keep this product out of reach of chil-
dren. An injury, etc. can result. Install the hand strap and belt clip securely. If they are installed improperly, the FT1XDR/DE may fall or drop, resulting in an injury or damage. Do not place a heavy object on the power cord of the battery charger. The battery cord can be damaged, re-
sulting in a fire or electric shock. Do not use the included battery char-
ger to charge any battery pack which is not specified for use with the char-
ger. A fire can result. Do not operate the transmitter near the TV or radio. Radio disturbance can occur in the transceiver, the TV, or the radio. Do not use any products other than the specified options and accesso-
ries. A failure can result. When the battery charger is not in use, remove its power plug from the outlet 9 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) Charge the battery pack within the temperature range from +5 C to
+35 C (+41 F to +95 F). Charging the battery pack outside this temperature range can cause leak, overheating, decrease in performance, or reduction in service life can result. When unplugging the power cord of the battery charger, be sure to hold the power plug. Pulling the power cord can damage it and cause a fire or electronic shock. Before discarding the worn battery pack, affix tape or the like to its ter-
minals. Before using this transceiver in a hybrid or fuel-saving car, be sure to check with the automobile manufac-
turer regarding use of the transceiver in that car. Noise generated by an onboard electri-
cal device (inverter, etc.) can disrupt the normal operation of the transceiver. 10 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Safety Precautions (Be Sure to Read) About Waterproofing Feature Conforming to IPX5 When the included antenna and battery pack are installed and the MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot are securely covered with rubber caps, this product is moisture and splash resistant. To ensure continued waterproofing pro-
tection, be sure to check the following points before use. m Check for damages, deterioration, and dirt. Antenna rubber, key switch rubber, MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, micro SD slot rubber cap, and battery pack joint. m Cleaning When this product is contaminated with seawater, sand, or dirt, rinse with fresh water, and then wipe with a dry cloth immediately. m Recommended maintenance interval It is recommended that you ask for maintenance of this product when one year has passed since purchase or previous maintenance or when any damage or deterioration is found. Note that the maintenance service is subject to fees. m Do not immerse this product in the following liquids:
Sea, pool, hot spring, water containing soap, detergent, or bath additive, alcohol, or chemicals m Do not leave this product for a long time in the following places:
Bathroom, kitchen, or humid place m Other precautions Since this product is not totally waterproof, it cannot be used in water. Before Transmitting Radio Waves If you are informed that the radio waves emitted from your amateur station are interfering with the TV, radio reception, etc., of a neighbor, you should stop emitting the radio waves, and determine whether any problem of interference exists, and if necessary resolve the interference problem. 11 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Names and Functions of Controls Antenna terminal (SMA)*
Flashlight (White LED) This LED can be used as a small flashlight in a dark place. A-band BUSY/TX lamp B-band BUSY/TX lamp These lamps light green during reception and red during transmission. p PTT switch While p switch is being pressed: Transmission. The Set mode ends when p switch is pressed during the Set mode. T switch USA/EXP version While T is being pressed: Squelch OFF European version While T is being pressed: T.CALL (1750 Hz) v switch justment While pressing v, turn O: Volume level ad-
Pressing v during the sound is being muted cancels the Mute function. P Power switch Press and hold P over 1 second: Power on. Press and hold P over 1 second again: Power off. Press P : Key lock A key (switching between operating bands) Pressing A each time switches between A-
band and B-band. Press and hold A over 1 second: Changes the Dual Band Reception mode to the Mono Band Reception mode. While operating the transceiver in the Mono Band Reception mode, press F and then A: Zooms in the display view. 12 M key Pressing M each time switches between the Frequency and BACKTRACK screen. Press and hold M over 1 second: Enters the Set mode. Battery pack*
O Turn this dial to change the reception frequency or select a memory channel. GPS antenna MIC/SP jack*
Connect a speaker microphone or earpiece micro-
phone to this jack. It is not waterproofed when an external micro-
phone is connected. Do not connect any microphone which is not specified by Yaesu. A failure can result. EXT DC IN jack*
When charging the battery pack, connect the bat-
tery charger (PA-48 or SAD-11B) to this jack. In the USA/EXP market, connect an external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (SDD-13) or an external power cable
(E-DC-6) to this jack. Do not connect any battery charger which is not specified by Yaesu. A failure can result. DATA terminal*
Use this terminal when using a clone function or Connect the optional camera-equipped micro-
updating the firmware. phone (MH-85A11U). For how to update the firmware, access our home page. Microphone Display This LCD displays reception frequencies and vari-
ous settings. Speaker 15 keys These keys are used to specify reception/transmis-
sion frequency or select a function. F switch Press F Function switch Press and hold F over 1 second: Registers a frequency to a memory channel.
* When the included antenna and battery pack are installed and the MIC/SP jack, EXT DC IN jack, DATA terminal, and micro SD slot are se-
curely covered with rubber caps, the FT1XDR/
DE meets the waterproofing performance con-
forming to IPX5 (See page 11). Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Names and Functions of Controls When pressed and held over 1 second The key is pressed after F pressed When pressed KEY When entering a frequency or recalling a memory CH between radio wave types.
% Switches D Turns on/off the GM H Determines the func-
function. tion selection Number 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Number 2 Number 3 Number 4 Number 5 Number 6 Number 7 Number 8 Number 9 When inputting a tag Moves the cursor to the right. Number 1 Number 2, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters A, B, C, a, b, or c Number 3, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters D, E, or F, d, e, or f Number 4, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters G, H, or I
, g, h, or i Number 5, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters J, K, or L, j, k, or l Number 6 , or Up-
per or Lower case characters M, N, or O, m, n, or o Number 7, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters P, Q, R, or S, p, q, or r, or s Number 8, or Upper or Lower case char-
acters T, U, or V, t, u, or v Number 9 , or Up-
per or Lower case characters W, X, or Y, Z, w, x, y, or z Number 0 Starts WiRES-X Enables transmission power level switch-
ing. Enables scan opera-
tion. Recalls a preset re-
ceiver memory chan-
nel Enables home chan-
nel selection. Enables function. reversal Enables AF DUAL function. Displays QSO LOG data. Transmits beacon. APRS Displays APRS sta-
tions/APRS Message LIST. Decreases quency band. Enables dual watch function. the fre-
Number 0 0 B Increases quency band. Switches between the VFO mode and Memory Channel mode. V the fre-
Enables band scope function. F Erases a character and the cursor moves to the left. Enters Channel mode. the Memory Registration 13 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Displays choice of the VFO mode or MR enabled Names and Functions of Controls A-band display area B-band display area Icons
(memory channel) mode. Displays a sound volume bar graph. Displays a transmission power level icon. Displays an operating frequency. S meter: Displays the radio wave strength in 9 steps. PO meter: Displays the transmission power level in 4 steps. H I: High power (5 W) L 3: LOW 3 power (2.5 W) L 2: LOW 2 power (1 W) L 1: LOW 1 power (0.1 W) Displays the operating mode (radio wave type). FM FM (Analog) mode FM Auto mode (automatic switching among Analog AM, Analog FM, and Digital) DN Wide digital mode (digital communi-
cation using C4FM modulation) VW Wide digital mode (High quality digi-
tal communication) Displays a squelch type (See page 84). TN:
Lights up when the tone encoder function is enabled. TSQ: Lights up when the tone squelch function is enabled. DCS: Lights up when the DCS function is RTN: Lights up when the reverse tone PR:
function is enabled. Lights up when the idle signal squelch function is enabled. PAG: Lights up when the pager is en-
abled. Displays the APRS baud rate (APRS function instruction manual). Displays a shift direction during repeater operation (See page 40).
: Minus shift
: Plus shift
@: Split operation b appears when the bell alarm function is active (See page 89). Icon Description of operation Displays battery condition.
<: Full battery power
>: Enough battery power
?: Low battery power _: Poor battery power. Charge
<
_ : Charge battery immediately battery.
(blink). is the DTMF
(See page 39).
(See page 127). enabled (See page 79). Description of operation Description of Icons Icon f Lights when a function key is pressed. d Lights when function
[ Lights when the APO function is active l Lights when the LOCK function is active
] Lights when the MUTE function is active s Lights when a micro SD memory card is inserted. Displays the transmission power level
(See page 36). H I: High power (5 W) L 3: LOW 3 power (2.5 W) L 2: LOW 2 power (1 W) L 1: LOW 2 power (0.1 W)
(See page 35). H I 14 Read this information firstApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 2.53 MiB |
Basic Operation Preparation Installing the Antenna 1 Align the antenna with the antenna terminal on the transceiver. Caution Be sure to hold the thick base of the antenna when installing it. 2 Turn the antenna clockwise until it is secured. Cautions Do not hold the upper part of the antenna when installing or removing it. To do so, the wire inside the antenna may break. Do not transmit without installing the antenna. The transmitter circuit can be damaged. When using an antenna other than the accessory or any other external antenna, ensure that its SWR is adjusted to 1.5 or lower. Attaching the Accessory Belt Clip/Protective Cap Attaching the Protective Cap 1 Attach the protective cap If you do not use the belt clip, attach the protective cap to the belt clip attaching screw holes on the battery pack. Attaching the Belt Clip 1 Turn over the battery pack. 2 Attach the belt clip to the battery pack using the sup-
plied screws (two). Cautions Be sure to use the supplied screws when attaching the belt clip. If any other screws are used. the belt clip cannot be secured firmly to the battery pack and the transceiver may drop off together with the battery pack, causing injury, breakage and other troubles. Be sure to attach the protective cap when the belt clip is not used. 15 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation Attaching a Hand Strap If you attach a hand strap to the transceiver, its string which is inserted in and secured to the strap hole of the transceiver must have a diameter of 1 mm.
* The hand strap is not an accessory. 1 Remove the battery pack. 2 Attach the hand strap. Cautions Use a hand strap which can withstand the weight of the transceiver. If you use a hand strap which is not strong enough, the hand strap can break and the transceiver fall down, causing injury, breakage and other troubles. How to Use the Battery Case (FBA-39) Optional The optional battery case (FBA-39) allows three (size) AA Alkaline batteries to be used for the power supply. Tips When the battery case (FBA-39) is used, you can select a power output level from:
Low Power (L1): 0.1W Low Power (L2): Approximately 0.8W Note that Low Power (L3) and High Power are not available. 1 Open the cover. Lift up the lower right corner indicated by the hand pointer in the illustration. 2 Put alkaline batteries in the battery case. Caution Use three alkaline batteries. Pay attention to polarities (+ and
) of the alkaline batteries. 3 Close the cover. Push the four corners of the cover firmly to close it tightly. Tips When the battery charge is low, _ lights on the LCD. When the bat-
teries are almost exhausted, _ blinks on the LCD. Cautions Manganese batteries cannot be used. Rechargeable AA batteries cannot be used, either. Do not mix new and old batteries. The service life of new batteries may decrease. If you do not use the transceiver for a long period, remove the batter-
ies from the battery case. If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the transceiver can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or explo-
sion. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. 16 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation Lock dials Push down on the latches in the direction of the arrow. Installing/Removing the Battery Pack Installing the Battery Pack Insert the bottom tabs of the battery pack in the slots at the bottom of the transceiver. 1 2 Push the battery in until the latches click securely. Caution When you use the transceiver for the first time after purchase or you have not used it for a long period, charge the battery pack before use. Caution Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.. Removing the Battery Pack 1 While pushing down and releasing the latches, re-
move the battery pack, as shown in the battery pack removal illustration. Caution When releasing the battery latches, be careful not to hurt your fingers and nails. Charging the Battery Pack Cautions The battery pack is rechargeable about 300 times. However, improper use such as overcharge or over-discharge can shorten its service life. The battery pack is a consumable item. Recharging the battery pack repeatedly will gradually short-
en the duration of its usage. If the transceiver is not used for a long period with the battery pack installed, deterioration of the battery pack can accelerate. If you do not use the transceiver for a long period, be sure to store it with the battery pack removed. Even if you do not use the transceiver for a long period, install the battery pack biannually and re-
charge the battery pack about 50% to prevent it from over-discharging. Storing the battery pack in a high-temperature place can deteriorate it faster than usual. Store the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is 20 C to +50 C (4 F to +122 F). Do not drop or give a strong shock to the battery pack. It can break. Tips The battery pack contains lithium-ion batteries that can be recharged for repetitive use. The transceiver can be used with either of the following battery packs:
(1) Accessory: SBR-14LI (7.2 V, 2,200 mAh)
(2) Option: FNB-101LI (7.4 V, 1,100 mAh) When the battery pack is recharged, its output voltage (about 8 V) becomes higher than the speci-
fied value (7.4 V). This is not a failure. 17 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation Grooves in battery pack Battery charger PA-48 or SAD-11B
(accessory) Rails Rapid Charger CD-41
(option) 1 Install the Battery Pack 2 Turn off the transceiver. 3 Insert the plug of the battery charger (PA-48 or SAD-11B) in the EXT DC IN jack of the transceiver. Charging starts. While the battery is being charged, the display will indi-
cate NOW CHARGING. The charge level is indicated by a bar graph. It takes about 8 hours to charge the battery pack fully. When charging is completed, the display will change to indicate COMPLETE and the lamp will glow green. Remark In the USA Version, the lamp is not lit when charg-
ing or when charging is complete. When the charge is complete, the transceiver turns off after 3 minutes.
Supplement It takes about 5 hours to charge the FNB-101LI (option). The optional Rapid Charger (CD-41) requires about 4 hours to charge the supplied battery pack
(about 2.5 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-101LI). Place the battery pack on the CD-41 so that the rails of the CD-41 fit into the grooves on the battery pack. When charging the battery pack using the CD-41, the LED on the CD-41 indicates the state of charging. During charging: Lights red Fast blink Slow blink Completion of charging: Lights green 18 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation 4 When charging is complete, remove the plug of the battery charger from the jack of the transceiver. Cautions Neither transmission nor reception can be performed while charging the battery pack using the sup-
plied battery charger. Charging may cause noise in the nearby TV or radio. Charge the battery pack with the battery char-
ger as far away as possible from a TV or radio. If BATTERY NOT INSTALLED appears on the LCD and the battery pack cannot be charged after lapse of 11 or more hours, stop charging the battery pack immediately. If the same message ap-
pears again, the battery pack is presumably at the end of its service life or defective. If so, replace the battery pack with a new one. While charging the battery pack, protect the transceiver from water. Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5 C to +35 C (+41 F to
+95 F). If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, this transceiver can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or rupture. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Tips The battery charger may become hot during charging. This is not a malfunction. If _ starts blinking, the battery pack charge is depleted. Charge it immediately. Approximate Operating Time and Remaining Charge Level Indication Approximate time to operate the transceiver with the fully charged battery pack or three new AA alkaline batteries is as follows:
Band in Use Digital: OFF Battery pack FNB-101LI Battery pack SBR-14LI Battery FBA-39 Amateur Band AM Broadcast Band FM Broadcast Band 144 MHz band Approx. 5.0 hours Approx. 10.0 hours Approx. 15.5 hours 430 MHz band Approx. 4.5 hours Approx. 9.0 hours Approx. 15 hours Approx. 10.0 hours Approx. 20.0 hours Approx. 18.0 hours Approx. 8.0 hours Approx. 16.0 hours Approx. 14.5 hours Band in Use Digital: ON Battery pack FNB-101LI Battery pack SBR-14LI Battery FBA-39 Amateur Band 144 MHz band Approx. 4.0 hours Approx. 8.0 hours Approx. 11.0 hours 430 MHz band Approx. 3.6 hours Approx. 7.2 hours Approx. 10.5 hours Transmission 6 seconds: Reception 6 seconds (VOL Level 16): Stand By 48 seconds (SAVE1:5) Remark Approximate hours are estimated assuming that the transceiver is operated under the fol-
lowing conditions. The operation time that this transceiver can be actually used varies depending on use conditions, ambient temperature, etc. When the GPS function is deactivated. When the transceiver is repeatedly operated by high-power transmission for 6 seconds and reception for 6 seconds, and standby for 48 seconds with an amateur ham radio band selected. 19 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation Connecting an External Power Supply for Use in Vehicle
(USA/EXP version only) The optional external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug
(SDD-13) allows the transceiver to be used in a vehicle. 1 Turn off the transceiver. 2 EXT DC IN jack Insert the plug of the external power supply adapter with a cigarette light-
er plug (SDD-13) in the EXT DC IN jack of the transceiver. Insert the cigarette lighter plug of the external power supply adapter (SDD-13) in the cigarette lighter socket of the vehicle. External power supply adapter with a cigarette SDD-13 (option) lighter plug 3 To cigarette lighter socket of vehicle Cautions The SDD-13 is compatible with a 12 VDC cigarette lighter socket. Do not connect the SDD-13 to the 24 VDC cigarette lighter socket. Use the transceiver at the minimum required transmission power level to prevent overheating. Do not continue transmission for a prolonged period of time. The transceiver may overheat, resulting in malfunction or burns. If you operate the transceiver for 7 hours or longer, it is recommended that you remove the battery pack and install the optional battery case (FBA-39). Recharging the fully-charged battery pack repeatedly can shorten its service life. Be extremely careful not to do so when you operate the transceiver when using an external power supply. While charging the battery pack, protect the transceiver from water. Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5 C to +35 C (+41 F to
+95 F). If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the transceiver can malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or rupture. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Tips The battery pack can be charged within approximately 8 hours using the external power supply (ap-
proximately 5 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-101LI). If the battery pack is charged with the transceiver turned on, the charging time increases slightly. When the battery pack has been fully charged, charging stops automatically. The external power supply can be used with the battery case installed. If you connect the transceiver to the external power supply with it turned off, CONNECTED TO EX-
TERNAL POWER appears on the LCD, and about 20 seconds later BATTERY NOT INSTALLED appears. Connecting to an External Power Supply Using a Power Cable
(USA/EXP version only) The optional power cable (E-DC-6) allows the transceiver to be connected to an external power supply. 20 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Preparation Connect the external antenna. External power supply 1 Turn off the transceiver. 2 Connect the optional external power supply cable (E-DC-6) to an external power supply. Remarks Connect the red/black wire or white/red wire to the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply and the black wire to the negative () terminal. Set the voltage of the external power supply to 12 to 14 V. 3 Insert the plug of the external power supply in the EXT DC IN jack of the transceiver. External power supply cable E-DC-6 (option) Cautions When you use the transceiver with the external power supply cable (E-DC-6) connected to an exter-
nal power supply, pay attention to the following:
The power supply voltage must be between 12 V and 14 V. If the voltage exceeds 14 V, the high voltage protection function is activated to disable high-power transmission. L3 (2.5 W) is selected automatically to reduce the transmission power. If the voltage exceeds 16 V, malfunctions such as damage to the electric circuits of the transceiver may result. Take extra care. Connect the red/black wire or white/black wire of the external power supply cable (E-DC-6) to the positive (+) terminal of the external power supply and the black wire to the negative () terminal. Use an external power supply having sufficient current capacity (3 A or more). If the transceiver is used with supplied antenna connected, the external power supply can malfunc-
tion, resulting in a failure. If you use an external power supply, remove the supplied antenna and connect an external antenna. Place the external power supply sufficiently away from the transceiver. Use the transceiver at the minimum required transmission power level to prevent overheating. Do not continue transmission for a prolonged period. The transceiver may overheat, resulting in malfunction or burn. If you operate the transceiver for 7 hours or longer, it is recommended that you remove the battery pack and install the optional battery case (FBA-39). Recharging the fully-charged battery pack repeatedly can shorten its service life. Be extremely care-
ful not to do so when you operate the transceiver using an external power supply. While charging the battery pack, protect the transceiver from water. Charge the battery pack in a place where the ambient temperature is +5 C to +35 C (+41 F to
+95 F). If the terminal or electrode of the battery case is dirty, the transceiver may malfunction due to poor contact, resulting in overheating or rupture. If the terminal or electrode gets dirty, clean it using a dry cloth or cotton swab. Tips The transceiver can be charged within approximately 8 hours using the external power supply(approximately 5 hours to charge the optional battery pack FNB-101LI). If the battery pack is charged with the transceiver turned on, the charging time increases slightly. The external power supply can be used with the battery case installed. If you connect the transceiver to the external power supply with it turned off, CONNECTED TO EX-
TERNAL POWER appears on the LCD, and about 20 seconds later BATTERY NOT INSTALLED appears. 21 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using a microSD memory card Using a microSD memory card with the transceiver allows the following functions. You can:
Back up information on the transceiver. Save memory information. Save data other than images. Save GPS log data. Save image data captured with the optional camera-equipped microphone (MH-
85A11U). Save messages downloaded with the GM function or WIRES-X function. Usable microSD memory cards This transceiver only supports the following capacity of microSD and microSDHD mem-
ory cards. 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB Cautions when using a micro SD memory card Do not bend or place heavy objects on the microSD memory card. microSD memory cards formatted on other devices may not properly save information when used with this transceiver. Format micro SD memory cards again with this trans-
ceiver when using memory cards formatted with another device. When saving data to a microSD memory card, do not remove the microSD memory card or turn off the transceiver. Do not insert anything other than microSD memory card into the microSD memory card slot of the transceiver. Do not attempt to forcefully remove mounted microSD memory card. Do not use microSD memory cards other than those specified by Yaesu. For the infor-
mation on the specified products, please contact Yaesu Amateur Ham Radio Customer Support. Mounting and dismounting microSD memory card 1 Turn off the transceiver. 22 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 2 Open the microSD cover on the side of the transceiver. Using a microSD memory card 3 Insert the microSD memory card into the card slot until you hear a click. (as shown in the figure at the right). Cautions Ensure that the microSD memory card is facing the proper direction when mounting it. Do not touch the terminal of the microSD memory card. Do not push the microSD memory card into this space. 4 Close the microSD cover. When the microSD memory card is properly detected, the s lights on the display. Tips Dismounting the microSD memory card. To dismount the microSD memory card, as done in step 3 above, push the memory card in until you hear a click, then remove the memory card.
* By using the micro SD Card Clip, it is easy to remove the micro SD memory Card. Caution Do not turn off the transceiver while the data is being written to the microSD memory card. Doing so may corrupt the data. 23 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using a microSD memory card Formatting a microSD memory card Format a new microSD memory card following the steps below before use. Caution Formatting a microSD memory card erases all data saved to it. If you are going to format the microSD memory card you are using, be sure to check the data saved to it before formatting. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [10 SD CARD]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 FORMAT]. 5 Press H.
[OK?] appears on the LCD. Tip To cancel formatting, select [Cancel]. 6 Press H. S (sicon) on the LCD blinks and formatting starts. When formatting is completed, a beep sound is emitted and
[Completed] appears on the LCD. Blinking while formatting is in progress 24 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Try communication using the transceiver in the analog communication mode. Follow the procedure below:
Turn on the transceiver Adjust the Volume Level Select an Operating Band Select a Frequency Band Turn in to a Frequency Perform Communication Turning on the Transceiver 1 Press and hold P over 1 second. 2 The callsign input screen appears. The callsign input screen appears when the transceiver is turned on for the first time after purchase. The next time, the frequency screen will appear after the opening screen. Input a callsign for your transceiver. Input the callsign with the ten key. 3 4 Press p. A-band (upper): 144.000 MHz B-band (lower): 430.000 MHz The callsign is set and two frequencies (A-band and B-band frequency) appear at the same time. Supplement Factory settings are:
Tips You can change the information such as the power supply voltage and the opening message displayed at power-on. For example, press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode and then select [1 DISPLAY] [9 OPENING MESSAGE] to change the opening message. In addition, you can set the transceiver to display the reception frequency immediately without displaying the opening message (See page 107). 25 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 3.00 MiB |
Performing Communication Turning off the Transceiver To turn off the transceiver, press and hold P over 1 second. Adjusting the Volume Level You can adjust the transceiver volume level for the A-band and B-band separately. 1 Press A to select the A-band or B-band for which you want to adjust the volume level. Pressing A each time toggles between the A-band and B-band. 2 While pressing v, turn O to adjust the volume level. The volume bar graph moves up/down. Supplement If no sound is heard from the speaker, press T and then adjust the volume level while listening to white noise. 3 Release v to exit from the Volume Level Adjustment mode. Tips Pressing v starts MUTE (silencing the audio) function, muting entire sound. Pressing v while the audio is being muted cancels the MUTE function. Sound Volume Bar Graph A SP VOLUME level among 0 trough 31 appears. 26 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Selecting an Operating Band The frequency displayed on the LCD in large letters is the operating band. You can change the frequency of the operating band and activate the transmitter. Each time A is pressed, the operating content displayed on the LCD screen is changed. A-band (operating band) B-band Press A. Press and hold A about 1 second. Press and hold A about 1 second. Press F Press A. Press A. Press F Press A. 27 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Tip On A-band, you can transmit and receive using the 144 MHz and 430 MHz Amateur radio bands. On B-band, you can transmit and receive using the 144 MHz and 430 MHz Amateur radio bands. In addition, the frequencies on the chart below can be received on A-band and B-band. Chart of A-band and B-band reception frequencies A-band and B-band reception frequencies A-band 0.5 MHz to 1.8 MHz
(AM BC Band) 76 (88) MHz to 108 MHz
(FM BC Band) 1.8 MHz to 30 MHz
(SW band) 30 MHz to 76 (88) MHz
(50 MHz band) B-band 108 MHz to 137 MHz 108 MHz to 137 MHz
(AIR band)
(AIR band) 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz
(VHF-TV Band) 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(INFO band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 774 (800) MHz
(UHF-TV Band) 803 (800) MHz to 999.9 MHz Cellular Blocked USA version 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz
(VHF-TV Band) 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(INFO band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 580 MHz
( ): EXP/European version A-band and B-band can be received at the same time. You can receive Amateur radio frequency while listening to the AIR band, or receive two Amateur radio frequencies on the same frequency band at the same time (V+V/U+U: Dual frequency reception on the same band). 28 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Selecting a Frequency Band You can select a frequency band to use for the A-band and B-band separately. Setting a Frequency Band for the A-band 1 Press A to select the A-band. 2 Press B repeatedly to select a frequency band. AM BC Band FM BC Band Short Wave Band 50 MHz band AIR band Cellular Blocked USA version UHF-TV Band 430 MHz band Information radio band (1) 144 MHz band VHF-TV Band Tip Pressing F and then B changes frequency bands shown above in the reverse order. Selecting a Frequency Band for B-band 1 Press A to select the B-band. 2 Press B to select a frequency band. AIR band 144 MHz band VHF-TV Band 470MH to 580MHz 430 MHz band Information radio band (1) Tip Pressing F and then B changes frequency bands shown above in the reverse order. Caution Digital communication can be performed only on the A-band. Digital communication cannot be performed on the B-band. Tips The frequency settings from the factory are:
A-band: 144.000 MHz B-band: 430.000MHz The factory setting of the Auto mode is set such that the transceiver is automatically switched to the optimal reception mode for the default frequency bands. To change the default reception mode, press and hold M for over 1 second and then select [2 TX/
RX] [1 MODE] [4RX MODE] (See page 38). For the relationship between frequency bands and reception frequencies, see the table on page 28. You can also recall the home channel of each frequency band by pressing F and then 4 (See page 45). 29 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Tuning in to a Frequency Tune in to your desired frequency using either of the following methods:
(1) Turn O to tune in to your desired frequency.
(2) Enter your desired frequency directly using the numeric keys. Tuning in to your desired frequency with O. 1 Switch to the VFO mode. 2 Turn O to tune in to your desired frequency. Turning O clockwise: The frequency increases. Turning O counterclockwise: The frequency de-
creases. Tip You can tune to the desired frequency in steps of 1 MHz by pressing F and turning O. Entering a Desired Frequency Directly Using Numeric Keys 1 Press V to enter the VFO mode, in which you can tune to the desired frequency. 2 Enter the desired frequency using numeric keys. Example: To enter 145.520 MHz, Press the T he following keys in sequence:
14552 Example: To enter 430.000 MHz, Press the T he following keys in sequence:
43H Tips In factory settings, the Auto Step mode is set such that the transceiver is automatically switched to the optimal frequency steps for the reception frequency. You can change frequency steps manually using O (See page 37). If you enter a wrong digit when entering a frequency using numeric keys, you can cancel it by press-
ing p. In factory settings, turning O beyond the selected frequency band does not change the selected frequency band to another frequency band and displays the selected frequency band repeatedly on the LCD. To prevent it, press and hold M for over 1 second to switch to the Set mode, select [8 CONFIG]
[21 VFO MODE] and change the [21 VFO MODE] to ALL. Thereby, you can change the frequency band to another frequency band by turning O beyond the selected frequency band. Selecting Communication Mode This transceiver can operate in both analog and digital communication modes. 30 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Analog Auto Pressing % repeatedly switches the communication mode as follows.
[Analog (FM)] [Auto ( FM)] [Digital (DN)] [Digital Wide (VW)]
FM:
Analog communication using FM mode. Automatically switches between Analog AM ( AM), Analog FM ( FM), and Digital ( DN). Digital communication using (C4FM (Quaternary FSK) modulation High sound quality of Digital Communication Wide Digital Digital VW:
DN:
Caution Digital communication can be performed only on the A-band. Performing Communication 1 Speak into the microphone while pressing p. When speaking into the microphone, keep it about 5 cm away from your mouth. 2 Release p. The transceiver returns to the Reception mode. Cautions Use the transceiver at the minimum required transmission power level. Doing so prevents the transceiver from overheating and saves battery power, increasing the operat-
ing time. Do not continue transmitting for a prolonged period. The transceiver can overheat, resulting in mal-
function or burn. If transmission is continued for a long period, the transceiver overheats and the overheat protection function is activated. As a result, the transmitting power level is automatically set to Low Power. If you continue transmitting while the overheat protection function is active, the transceiver will be forc-
ibly returned to the Reception mode. If you touch the transceiver immediately after the overheat protection function has become active, you can get burned. Wait for the temperature inside the transceiver to drop sufficiently before resum-
ing transmission. Do not perform transmission without attaching the antenna. The transmitter circuit can be damaged. Tips In the FM mode, you can transmit on the 144 MHz and 430 MHz ham radio bands. Even while you are receiving in the AM mode, you can transmit in the FM mode by pressing p. You can change the transmit power level by pressing F and then 1. Transmit power level may be lower when using the battery pack or the alkaline battery case. For more details, see Changing the Transmission Power Level on page 36. If p is pressed when a frequency other than the amateur ham radio band is selected, an alarm tone
(beep) will be emitted and ERROR appears on the LCD, disabling transmission. Pressing and holding M for over 1 second, and changing the Set Mode option [8 CONFIG] will allow you to use the transceiver more conveniently. Selecting [8 CONFIG] [2 BCLO] prohibits transmission during reception of a signal. 31 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Performing Communication Selecting Communication Mode This transceiver is equipped with AMS (Automatic Mode Select) which automatically se-
lects between 4 modes of transmission to fit the signal being received. Because the trans-
mission is automatically adjusted to that of the other station, not only C4FM digital signals, but analog signals are also recognized. Press % to display [ DN*] on the LCD.
* (The display depends on the received signal.)
Example of when AMS is displayed. To fix the transmission mode for operation, switch the transmission mode with %. Pressing % toggles between communication modes in the order listed below.
[ DN (AMS)] [DN (V/D mode)] [VW (FR mode)] [FM (analog)]
Operation mode AMS
(Automatic Mode Select) V/D Mode
(Voice/Data simultaneous transmission mode) Voice FR Mode
(Voice Full Rate Mode) Data FR Mode (High Speed Data Communication Mode) Analog FM Mode Display Transmission mode is automatically selected from 4 types ac-
Description of Modes cording to the signal received.
( part differs depending on the received signal.) The AMS feature settings may be changed via Set Mode ( p.112). Call is less prone to interruption due to detection and correction of voice signals during digital voice signal transmission. This is the standard mode for C4FM FDMA Digital DN VW Digital voice data transmission using the entire 12.5kHz band. Enables high-quality voice communication. High speed data communication using entire 12.5kHz band. This mode is automatically selected for image communication. Analog communication using FM mode. Effective when the signal is weak and audio is susceptible to interruption in digital mode. FM Cautions Digital communication can be performed only on the A-band. Digital communication cannot be performed on the B-band. In V/D mode (DN on the LCD), position information is included in the radio wave during voice communication, however, it is not include in the Voice FR mode (VW on the LCD). 32 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Listening to the Radio Listening to the AM/FM Radio AM broadcast stations can be easily received using Preset Memory Receiver (See page 52), where many major broadcast stations are already saved to this transceiver, or the stations can be directly tuned in by inputting the frequency of the desired broadcast sta-
tion with the O and key pad. 1 Press A Set A band as the operating band. 2 Press B Select either the AM broadcast or FM broadcast bands. The R icon will ap-
pear on the display while in the Broadcast Reception mode. 3 Adjust the frequency by turning O or using the key pad (See page 30). Tip Broadcast stations that are frequently listened to can be saved to memory (See page 43). If you would like to scan a radio band, set A band as the operating band and press F, then 2. If a signal is detected during the scan, a beep will sound; the transceiver will receive the signal for 5 seconds then resume scanning. The decimal point will flash when the scan is stopped. Switching between AM Antennas When listening to AM broadcast stations, the Bar and external antennas may be switched for best reception according to conditions. During normal use, you may not need to switch between AM antennas. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [1 ANTENNA AM]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to switch to the desired antenna. Operation
Display BAR & EXT ANTENNA AM broadcasts can be received using both the whip antenna provided at the top of the transceiver and the built-in bar antenna.
BAR ANTENNA When receiving AM broadcasts, the trans-
ceiver uses only the built-in bar antenna. Rotate the transceiver to adjust the AM broadcast (middle wave band) for the best receiving sensitivity.
9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. 33 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings Setting clock time This transceiver is equipped with an internal clock. The clock is used to display the time, and also to turn the transceiver on or off at a specified time (timer function). Set the clock before using the transceiver for the first time. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [19 DATE & TIME ADJ]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to set [YEAR]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to set [MONTH]. 9 Repeat steps 5 and 6. Set [DAY], [HOUR], and [MINUTE]
Pressing F moves the cursor to the setting item shown on the left.
The cursor moves to [MONTH].
Remark The hour appears in the 24-hour clock format. Tip If GPS information is received, the clock will be set automatically. Next, set the time signal alarm. If you do not want to set the time signal alarm, proceed to step 3 described in Setting the Time Signal. Setting the Time Signal Set the time signal so that a tone is emitted at 00 minute of each hour. 1 Press B. The cursor moves to [ ]. 2 Turn O to select SIG. If you select [TIME SIGNAL] you will hear a time signal tone
(beep) at 00 minute of each hour. If you do not want to hear the time signal tone, leave as it is. 3 Press H. 4 Press H to save the [TIME SIGNAL] setting. 5 Press p to exit from the Set mode. The cursor moves to [SET].
Remark When MONOBAND RECEPTION is selected, the current time appears on the LCD. 34 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings Tips The accuracy of the clock is 30 seconds/month. However, it may vary depending on the environment conditions, such as the temperature. The transceiver is equipped with a dedicated rechargeable lithium battery for the clock. Normally, the transceiver is powered from the battery pack. When the battery pack is detached or runs out, the lithium battery starts operating automatically. The lithium battery can power the clock for approximately 2 months. When you use the transceiver for the first time or without the battery pack for a long period of time, the accuracy of the clock may be poor. In such case, reattach the battery pack and adjust the time. When the transceiver is operating in Mono band, the current time appears on the LCD. However, when display of double-size characters or dual display is selected, the current time does not appear on the LCD. The calendar can display dates from January 1, 2000 A.D. up to December 31, 2099 A.D. If AUTO is selected in [9 APRS] [21 GPS TIME SET] in the Set mode, the clock will automatically display accurate time. However, the day of the week is not set automatically. Set the day of the week manually. If you use the timer function, the transceiver will be turned off automatically (See page 132). In addition, you can set the transceiver to turn on at the specified time (See page 132). Muting Audio If it is difficult to hear the voice because the audio of A-band and the B-band are mixed during dual reception, you can mute the audio of the non-operating band. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to select the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 AUDIO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [2 MUTE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select a mute level. Remark You can select one of the following 4 levels of mute:
MUTE 30%
MUTE 50%
MUTE 100%
OFF The higher the value for MUTE, the more the non-operating band audio is reduced. To deactivate the muting function, select OFF. 35 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings 9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. Remark When the muting function is active, ] appears on the LCD. When the muting function is active, ] blinks on the LCD. Tips Even if the muting function is activated, the voice is not muted when no signal is received on the operating band. Pressing v while in frequency display screen, zooms in on [MUTE] and both A and B bands can be muted simultaneously. Pressing v again will deactivate MUTE. Changing the Transmission Power Level The maximum transmission power level of this transceiver is 5W. When communicating with a friend in the immediate area or when you want to reduce the battery power con-
sumption, you can lower the transmit power level. For power supply types and transmit power levels, see the table shown below. 1 Press F and then 1. 2 Turn O to select the transmit power level. Select [LOW1], [LOW2], [LOW3], or [HIGH] by turning O. 3 Press p to save the selected transmit power level. Battery type Battery pack External power supply
(13.8 VDC) Battery Case
(alkaline battery) HI (High Power) L3 5 W 2.5 W L2 1 W L1 0.1 W Approx. 0.8 W 0.1 W Tips You can set the transmitter power level separately for the A-band and B-band. Use the transceiver at the minimum required transmit power level to reduce battery power consumption. By default, HI (High power) is selected. 36 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings Adjusting the Squelch Level You can mute the raspy noise heard when no signal is being received. The squelch level can be adjusted separately for two broadcasts (FM and AM) received on the A-band and B-band. When the squelch level is increased, the noise is more liable to disappear but, if it is set too high, it becomes difficult to receive weak signals. Adjust the squelch level as required. 1 Press A to select the desired operating band. 2 On the FT1XDR, press F and then T. On the FT1XDE, press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode, and then select [4 SIGNALING] [8 SQL LEVEL]. 3 Turn O to adjust the squelch level. Remark The squelch level can be adjusted within the range from 0 to 15. Default: LEVEL 1 4 Press p to save the Squelch Level Adjustment and exit the Squelch Level Adjustment mode. Tips While T is held pressed, the squelch function will be deactivated for both the A-band and B-band. Changing the Frequency Step Manually By default, AUTO (Step) is selected so that the optimum frequency step is automati-
cally selected according to the received frequency. You can change this frequency step manually. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. Enters the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [18 STEP]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select your desired frequency step. Remark Selectable frequency steps are as follows:
5 KHz 10 KHz 20 KHz 100KHz AUTO
(8.33 KHz) 15 KHz 50 KHz It is recommended that AUTO be selected normally. Default: AUTO 6.25 KHz 12.5 KHz 25 KHz 7 Press p to save the frequency step, and exit the Frequency Step Setting mode. 37 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings Tips For the AIR band (108 MHz to 136.991 MHz), the frequency step 8.33 kHz can be selected. For bands covering 250MHz to 300MHz, and bands covering 580 MHz or higher, the frequencies, frequency steps 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, and 15 kHz cannot be selected. Changing the Mode Manually By default, the reception (RX) is set to AUTO (Auto Mode) so that the optimal reception mode (radio wave type) is automatically selected according to the receiving band (fre-
quency band). You can change this mode manually. Enters the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [4 RX MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select your desired reception mode. It is recommended that AUTO be selected normally. Display AUTO The optimal reception mode is automatically selected Operation according to the frequency band. Only the selected band is switched to the NFM (FM mode). Only the selected band is switched to the AM mode. FM AM 9 Press p to exit the Set mode. Tip Even if the AM mode is selected on a ham radio band, 144 MHz band or 430 MHz band, transmission takes place in the FM mode. Caution You cannot change the mode of A-band AM/FM broadcast radio bands. 38 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Miscellaneous Settings Locking keys and switches To prevent accidental frequency change during operation, keys, switches and O except p switch, T, v, P can be locked. 1 Press P to lock the keys and switches. l appears on the LCD. Remark To unlock a key or switch, press P again. l disappears from the LCD. Tip You can also lock the O and p switch by selecting the Set mode option [8 CONFIG] [9 LOCK]. Restoring to Defaults (All Reset) You can restore all transceiver settings and memory content, such as memory channels, to the defaults. 1 Press P while pressing %, D, and H. The transceiver is turned on, followed by beep. When you hear the beep, release the keys. 2 When ALL RESET PUSH F KEY! appears on the LCD, press F. A beep sounds and the callsign input screen appears on the LCD. Input a callsign for your transceiver. Input the callsign with the numeric keys. 3 4 Press p to save your callsign and the screen returns to the frequency display. Remark To cancel the All Reset function, press a key or switch other than F. Caution When the All Reset function is performed, all data such as memory channels registered in the memory is deleted. Be sure to write it down on paper or back up the data on the microSD memory card (See pages 138 to 139). Tip To return only the Set Mode option settings to default, press P while pressing % and V. 39 Basic OperationApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Repeater Operation Repeater Operation Communicating Via the Repeater The transceiver includes an ARS (Automatic Repeater Shift) function which permits com-
munication through the repeater automatically just by setting the receiver to the repeater frequency. 1 Set the receive frequency to the repeater frequency. appears in the upper right corner of the LCD. 2 Press p, to begin communicating through the repeat-
or er. Tips Pressing F and then pressing 5 enters the reverse state where the transmit frequency and the receive frequency are temporarily reversed. This allows you to check and find if direct communication with the remote station is possible. In the reverse state, [ ] blinks on the LCD. Pressing F again and then 5 exits the reverse state. Press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode and change the options to allow more convenient use of this function.
[8 CONFIG] [14 RPT ARS] You can deactivate the ARS function.
[8 CONFIG] [15 RPT SHIFT] You can set the repeater shift direction.
[8 CONFIG] [16 RPT SHIFT FREQ] You can change the repeater shift step. R e p e a t e r O p e r a t i o n Tone Calling (1750 Hz) If your transceiver is FT1XDE (European version), press and hold in the T switch
(just below the p switch) to generates a 1750 Hz burst tone to access the European repeater. The transmitter will automatically be activated, and a 1750 Hz audio tone will be superimposed on the carrier. Once access to the repeater has been gained, you may release the T switch, and use the p switch for activating the transmitter thereafter. If you need to access the repeaters which requires a 1750 Hz burst tone for access by the FT1XDR (USA/EXP versions), you can set the T switch to serve as a Tone Call switch instead. To change the configuration of this switch, use Set Mode [8 CONFIG]
[10 MONI/T-CALL]. 40 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Repeater Shift The FT1XDR/DE has been configured, at the factory, for the repeater shifts customary in the country where it is sold. For the 144 MHz band, this usually will be 600 kHz, while the 430 MHz shift will be 1.6 MHz, 7.6 MHz, or 5 MHz (USA version). Depending on the part of the band in which you are operating, the repeater shift may be either downward () or upward (+), and one of these icons will appear to the right of the display frequency on the LCD when repeater shifts have been enabled. Automatic Repeater Shift (ARS) The FT1XDR/DE Automatic Repeater Shift feature causes the appropriate repeater shift to be automatically applied whenever it is tuned into the designated repeater sub-bands. If the ARS feature does not appear to be working, you may have accidentally disabled it. To re-enable ARS:
1 Press and hold the M for over 1 second to enter the set mode. 2 Turn the O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn the O to select [14 RPT ARS]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn the O to select ON (to enable Automatic Repeater Shift). 7 Press the p to save the new setting and exit the Set mode. R e p e a t e r O p e r a t i o n 41 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Memory A Wide Variety of Memory Functions The FT1XDR/DE transceiver provides the following various types of memory channels in addition to the regular memory channels (numbers 001 to 900).
[Home channels] which can be recalled on each frequency band with one touch of a key. (See page 45) Preset Receiver Memory Channels such as VHF Weather Broadcast Station (10 chan-
nels), international VHF (marine) radios (57 channels) and world broadcasts (89 chan-
nels) (see pages 51 to 55) 99 (901 to 999) skip search memory channels that allow you to skip unwanted frequen-
cies during VFO scanning (See page 58) 50 sets of memory channels (L01/U01 to L50/U50) for programmable memory chan-
nels scanning (PMS) (See page 63) Memory tag DCS information The operating frequency and other operational information can be registered to each regular memory channel, home channel, or PMS memory channel:
Operating frequency Tone information Memory channel skip information
(The operating mode information is not registered to the memory channels) Memory channels can be sorted and registered to memory banks according to the in-
tended use. The transceiver allows you to use 24 types of memory banks. A maximum of 100 memory channels can be registered to each memory bank. A name can be assigned to each memory bank with up to 16 characters. (See page 48) Repeater information Transmission output Memory Channel Configuration of the transceiver Memory channels
(900 channels)
Skip search memory channels
(99 channels) PMS memory channels
(50 sets)
Home channels
(11 channels) Preset receiver memory channels Memory banks
(24 banks) Up to 100 memory channels can be registered to each bank.
Memory channels for short wave broadcasts
(89 channels and international VHF (marine) radios (57 channels)) i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 42 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Registering to Memory Channel Caution The information such as operating frequency that is registered to memory channels can be corrupted due to wrong operation, static electricity, or electrical noise. Also, it can be erased in the case of a failure or repair. Be sure to write it down on paper or otherwise save the information (See pages 138 to 139). The transceiver allows you to use 900 memory channels (memory channel numbers 1 to 900). 1 Switch to the VFO mode. 2 Tune in to a frequency by turning O. Select the frequency you want to register to a memory chan-
nel. 3 Press and hold F over 1 second. Enters the Memory Channel Registration mode, and the number of the memory channel next to the memory channel to which you registered a frequency last blinks. Remarks To cancel the memory channel registration, press the p switch. To register a frequency to a memory channel specified, Turn O to select the memory channel. The ( icon indicating [The specified memory channel is unregistered] lights, and the memory channel blinks. The ) icon indicating [The specified memory channel is registered] lights. Pressing M each time skips memory channels quickly in steps of 100 memory channels. 4 Press F to complete the memory channel registration. The registered frequency appears on the LCD. When registering a frequency to a memory channel already registered, Overwrite OK? appears on the LCD. Tips By default, 144.000 MHz is registered to the memory channel 1. It can be changed to another fre-
quency, but not be deleted. The frequency which has been registered to a memory channel can be overwritten with a new frequency. When you attempt to register a new frequency to a memory channel, an unregistered memory chan-
nel appears. To display the lowest unregistered memory number when you register a frequency to a memory channel, press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode, and then select [3 MEMORY] [6 MEMORY WRITE]. To inhibit registration to all memory channels, press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode, and then select [3 MEMORY] [4 MEMORY PROTECT]. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 43 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Split Memory Two different frequencies, one for reception and other for transmission, can be registered to a memory channel. 1 Register a receive frequency to a memory channel. Remark See Registering to Memory Channel above. 2 Select a transmit frequency in the VFO mode. 3 Press and hold F over 1 second. 4 Turn O to select the memory channel number that you registered the receive fre-
5 While pressing p, press F to save the Split memory quency to. channel. When you recall the memory channel to which you reg-
istered two different frequencies (one for receive and the other for transmit), the @ appears on the LCD Recalling a Memory Channel Recall a registered memory channel using the following procedure:
1 Press V to enter the Memory mode and the memory channel you used last appears on the LCD. 2 Turn O to select the desired memory channel. Select the memory channel to use.
Remarks You can directly recall a memory channel using numeric keys. To recall memory channel 15: Press 15H Pressing F and turning O allows you to skip memory channels quickly in steps of 10 memory channels. 3 Press V to exit the Memory mode, and the frequency selected in the VFO mode appears. Tips Unregistered memory channels are skipped. By default, a priority memory channel, which is used as dual receive priority memory channel, is set to the memory channel number 1. [P] appears on the upper right corner of the priority memory channel number (See page 75). The frequency registered to a memory channel can be transferred to the VFO operating band in the following procedure:
Press and hold F over 1 second. Press V OVERWRITE OK? appears Press V. To place the FT1XDR/DE transceiver in the Memory Channel only mode, use the following procedure, which allows the use of memory channels only. Press V while pressing P to turn on the transceiver. To cancel the Memory Channel Only mode, press P while pressing V again. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 44 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Recalling Home Channel 1 Press F and then 4. The home channel of the currently selected frequency band appears on the LCD. Tips For the relationship between the frequency bands and the home channel frequencies, see the table on the next page. Selecting a frequency by turning O allows you to return to the VFO mode. Frequency band AM BC Band FM BC Band
(SW band) 50 MHz
(AIR band) Frequency 540 kHz 76.000 (88.000) MHz 1.800 MHz 50.000 MHz 108.000 MHz Frequency band 174 to 222 MHz band
(INFO band (1)) 430 MHz band 470 to 770 MHz band Information radio band (2) 144 MHz band 146.520 (144.000) MHz Frequency 174.000 MHz 222.000 MHz 446.000 (430.000) MHz 470.000 MHz 860.000 MHz
( ): EXP/European version Returning to the Previous Frequency The frequency used before recalling the home channel appears on the LCD. 1 Press F and then 4 Changing Home Channel Frequency You can change a default home channel frequency. 1 Switch to the VFO mode. 2 Turn O to select a frequency. Select a frequency to change. 3 Press and hold F for over 1 second to enter the Write mode. 4 Press D. 5 Press D. When the home channel frequency has been overwritten by a new frequency, the home channel frequency of the se-
lected frequency band is changed. OVERWRITE? appears on the LCD for about 5 seconds.
i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 45 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 A Wide Variety of Memory Functions Deleting Memory Channel 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second. 3 Turn O to select the memory channel to delete. 4 Press H. MASK? appears on the LCD for about 3 seconds. Remark To cancel the memory channel deletion operation, press F. 5 Press H to delete the memory channel. Remark To delete other memory channels, repeat steps 2 through 5.
Caution Memory channel 1 cannot be deleted. Tips The memory channel specified as a priority memory channel cannot be deleted. To delete a priority memory channel, specify it as a regular memory channel, then delete it. The last used memory channel appears. Restoring Deleted Memory Channel You can restore a deleted memory channel. 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second. 3 Turn O to select the memory channel to restore. 4 Press H to restore the deleted memory channel. Using Memory Tag Memory channels and home channels can be assigned a name (memory tag) such as a callsign or broadcast station name. A memory tag can be specified with up to 16 charac-
ters. The following types of characters can be entered:
Alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase characters) Numeric characters (numbers) Symbols i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 46 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Assigning a Name to a Memory Channel A Wide Variety of Memory Functions The cursor appears on the LCD. Example: Assignment of name [YAESU]
1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Recall the memory channel to assign a name. 3 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 4 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY NAME]. 7 Press H. 8 Press 9 8 times to select the numeric character [Y]. 9 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 10 Press 2 5 times to select the numeric character [A]. 11 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 12 Press 3 6 times to select the numeric character [E]. 13 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 14 Press 7 9 times to select the numeric character [S]. 15 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 16 Press 8 6times to select the numeric character [U]. 17 Press p to save the memory tag to the memory channel and exit the Set mode. Tips To delete a character, press F. The character is deleted and the cursor moves to left. Pressing 0 while entering alphanumeric characters (A,0) allows you to select 0, (space), , /, ?,
!, ., : and #
When entering the same character repeatedly, press H to move the cursor. When assigning a name to a home channel, recall the target home channel by first executing step 1
(see above). Displaying Memory Tag During mono band operation, the tag (name) of the memory channel or home channel can be displayed using the following procedure:
1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold A for over 1 second. The operating band is displayed in Mono band, and a tag
(name) appears under the frequency.
i U s n g t h e M e m o r y Tag (name) display 47 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using Memory Bank Registered memory channels can be sorted according to the intended use. The trans-
ceiver allows you to use 24 types of memory banks. A maximum of 100 memory channels can be registered to each memory bank. One memory channel can be registered in two or more memory banks. If the memory channel registered in any memory bank is changed or updated, the content of the cor-
responding memory channel in the other memory banks is automatically changed or up-
dated. Memory channels 1 145.000MHz 2 145.500MHz 3 120.400MHz 4 5 439.700MHz 6 432.800MHz 7 108.700MHz 8 9 10
~
900 Memory banks 144MHz band is registered. 430MHz band is registered. Ham radio bands are registered together. AIR band is registered.
(1~100) b1
(1~100) b2
(1~100) b3
(1~100) b4
(1~100) b5
(1~100) b6
(1~100) b7
(1~100) b8
(1~100) b9 b10 (1~100) b24 (1~100)
~
Registering a Memory Channel in a Memory Bank 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Turn O to select a memory channel. Select the memory channel to register in a memory bank. 3 Press and hold F for over 1 second to enter the Memory Write mode. 4 Turn O to select a memory bank number. Select the number (B1 to B24) of the memory bank to regis-
Bank number Bank name ter the memory channel. 5 Press F to register the memory channel in the memory bank. Tips See Registering Your Favorite Preset Receiver Memory Channels in Memory Bank on page 51. When selecting a memory bank using O, the memory channel, skip search memory channel, and programmable memory channel appear on the LCD as well. They appear repeatedly on the LCD in the following order:
1 2 3 ...L50 U50 BANK1 BANK2 ...BANK24 1 2... When the displayed number is close to [1], turning O counterclockwise will display memory banks. When the displayed number is close to [U50], turning O clockwise will display memory banks. Pressing M displays memory banks quickly in steps of 100 memory channels. If the bank name was changed, the changed bank name appears. The icon appears for a memory bank in which no memory channel is registered, and the icon appears for a memory bank in which at least one memory channel is registered. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 48 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Recalling Memory Bank 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press B. Pressing B each time toggles between the memory channel number and bank number. 3 Press F and then B. 4 Turn O to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank. 5 Press B. 6 Turn O to select a memory channel. Select a memory channel in the memory bank. The memory bank to be used is determined. Remarks To select another memory bank, repeat steps 3 through 5. To return to the Regular Memory Channel mode, press B. Using Memory Bank Bank number Memory channel number Bank number
Bank name Canceling Memory Channel Registration in Memory Bank 1 Recall the memory bank in which the memory channel registration is to be deleted. See Recalling Memory Bank above. 2 Turn O to select a memory channel that is to be canceled from the Memory bank. 3 Press and hold F over 1 second, and then press H. Registration of memory channel in the memory bank is cancelled, returning to the memory bank display state. If no other memory channel is registered in the memory bank, the memory bank having the lowest bank number appears. Assigning Name to Memory Bank A memory bank can be specified with up to 16 characters. The following types of characters can be entered:
Alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase characters) Numeric characters (numbers) Example: 144Mz band 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set Symbols mode. 2 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 3 Press H. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y Bank number 49 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Bank number Change the bank name. Enter a name (First digit) Using Memory Bank 4 Turn O to select [2 BANK NAME]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a memory bank. Select the number of the memory bank to which you want to assign a name. bank name. 7 Press H to move the cursor to the first character of the 8 Press 1 to select the numeric character [1]. 9 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 10 Press 4 7 times to select the numeric character [4]. Pressing 4 allows you to select the following characters sequentially:
G H I g h i 4 G 11 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 12 Press the 4 key 7 times to select the numeric character
[4]. Pressing the 4 key allows you to select the following char-
acters sequentially:
G H I g h i 4 G 13 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 14 Press 6 to select [M]. Pressing 6 allows you to select the following characters sequentially:
M N O m n o 6 M 15 Press H to move the cursor to the next character position. 16 Select [H]. 17 Press [9] 8 times. Select [z]. 18 Press p to save the name of memory bank and exit the Set mode. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y Tips
!, ., : and #
To delete a character, press F. A character is deleted and the cursor moves to left. Pressing 0 while entering alphanumeric characters (A,0) allows you to select 0, (space), , /, ?, When entering the same type of characters repeatedly, press H to move the cursor. 50 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels Frequencies of SP1 Weather Broadcast (10 channels). SP2 International VHF (marine) radio (57 channels) and SP3 Shortwave Broadcasts (89 channels) are preset in the pre-
set receiver memory channels. These channels can be selected in advance from region to region. VHF Weather Broadcast Station preset receiver memory channels
[SP1 WX CH] ......................................................................................................Page 52 The frequencies (10 channel) used for the VHF Weather Broadcast Station are regis-
tered to the dedicated preset receiver memory channels. International VHF (marine) radio preset receiver memory channels
[SP2 INTVHF] .....................................................................................................Page 53 The frequencies (57 channel) used for the international VHF (marine) radio are regis-
tered to the dedicated preset receiver memory channels. World broadcast preset receiver memory channels
[SP3 SW] ............................................................................................................Page 54 You can listen to major broadcasts from around the world (total 89 channels). Registering Your Favorite Preset Receiver Memory Channels in Memory Bank You can register your favorite preset receiver memory channel in a memory bank. 1 Turn O to select your favorite preset receiver memory channel. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second to enter the Memory Bank Write mode. The f blinks on the LCD. Remark To cancel registration, press p. 3 Turn O to select the memory bank in which you want to register your favorite preset receiver memory channel. 4 Press the F to register the preset receiver memory channel in the memory bank, and the frequency appears on the LCD. Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the Weath-
er Broadcast 1 Press A to set A-band to the operating band. 2 Press F and then 3 to enter the Preset Receiver mode. 3 Press B. Select [SP1 WX CH]. 4 Turn O to select a preset Weather Broadcast receiver memory channel to listen to. Remark To stop reception of the Weather Broadcast, press 3. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 51 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the Interna-
tional VHF (Marine) Radio The frequencies (57 channels) used for the international VHF (marine) radio are regis-
tered to the dedicated preset receiver memory channels. 1 Press A to set A-band to the operating band. 2 Press F and then 3 to enter the Preset Receiver mode. 3 Press B. Select [SP2 INTVHF]. 4 Turn O to select a preset VHF receiver memory channel
to listen to. Remark To stop reception of the international VHF radio, press 3. In the event of extreme weather disturbances, such as storms and hurricanes, the NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration) sends a weather alert ac-
companied by a 1050 Hz tone and subsequent weather report on one of the NOAA weather channels. You may enable the Weather Alert tone via Set Mode option
[4 SIGNALING] [14 WX ALERT], if desired (See page 124). Tips The preset receiver memory channel cannot be rewritten with the data of another frequency. To scan the preset receiver memory channels toward higher channel numbers, press F and then 2. Turning O one click counterclockwise scans the preset receiver memory channels toward lower channel numbers. If a signal is received during scanning, the scanning is suspended for 5 seconds. The operation that is performed when scanning stops can be set by following the procedure described in Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 59. CH 1 2 3 4 5 WX Channel Frequency List Frequency 162.550 MHz 162.400 MHz 162.475 MHz 162.425 MHz 162.450 MHz CH 6 7 8 9 10 Frequency 162.500 MHz 162.525 MHz 161.650 MHz 161.775 MHz 163.275 MHz i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 52 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels Frequencies of International VHF (Marine) Radio registered to the preset receiver memory channels Memory channel No. Frequency (MHz) Memory channel No. Frequency (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 160.650*
160.700*
160.750*
160.800*
160.850*
156.300 156.350 160.950*
156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 161.500*
161.550*
161.600*
161.650*
161.700*
161.750*
161.800*
161.850*
161.900*
161.950*
162.000*
Memory No. Frequency (MHz) Memory No. Frequency (MHz) 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 160.625*
160.675*
160.725*
160.775*
160.825*
160.875*
160.925*
156.375 156.425 156.475 156.525 156.575 156.625 156.675 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 156.725 156.775 156.825 156.875 156.955 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.550*
161.575*
161.625*
161.675*
161.725*
161.775*
161.825*
161.875*
161.925*
161.975*
162.025*
Remark
* indicates the frequency of the VHF Marine base station. For example, if the preset receiver memory channel 1 is selected, the base station frequency 160.650 MHz appears and @ lights. Pressing F and then 5 displays the Ship Station frequency 160.650 MHz and @ lights The base station fre-
quency minus 4.6 MHz equals the Ship Station frequency, and duplex operation starts. To return to the base station frequency, press F and then 5. i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 53 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels Recalling Preset Receiver Memory Channel to Listen to the World Broadcast The frequencies (89 channels) used for the world broadcast are registered to the dedicated preset receiver memory channels. 1 Press A to set A-band to the operating band. 2 Press F and then 3 to enter the Preset Receiver mode. 3 Press B. Select [SP3 SW]. 4 Turn O to select a preset world Broadcast receiver memory channel to listen to. Remark To stop reception of the world broadcast, press 3. Depending on time zone or signal strength, Broadcasts may not be received. There are broadcast station other than those listed below that can be received. In addition, depending on the broadcast station, the frequency may be changed, off-air, or have become abolished. For details, please refer to a commercially sold frequencies list. Worldwide short wave broadcast Broadcast Station CH Frequency Number Name VOA VOA VOA VOA CANADA CANADA CANADA CANADA BBC BBC BBC BBC FRANCE FRANCE FRANCE FRANCE DW DW DW DW ITALY ITALY ITALY ITALY Name USA USA USA USA Canada Canada Canada Canada UK UK UK UK France France France France Germany Germany Germany Germany Italy Italy Italy Italy CH Number 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Frequency
(MHz) 7.170 7.270 9.560 11.690 9.660 11.625 11.830 15.235 5.955 6.020 9.895 11.655 5.985 6.105 9.455 11.860 9.780 11.630 15.550 21.655 9.650 11.880 11.910 15.290 Name TURKEY TURKEY TURKEY TURKEY VATICAN VATICAN VATICAN VATICAN NEDRLAND NEDRLAND NEDRLAND NEDRLAND CZECH CZECH CZECH CZECH PORTUGAL PORTUGAL PORTUGAL PORTUGAL SPAIN SPAIN SPAIN SPAIN Broadcast Station Name Turkey Turkey Turkey Turkey Vatican Vatican Vatican Vatican Netherlands Netherlands Netherlands Netherlands Czech Republic Czech Republic Czech Republic Czech Republic Portugal Portugal Portugal Portugal Spain Spain Spain Spain
(MHz) 6.030 6.160 9.760 11.965 9.555 9.660 11.715 11.955 6.195 9.410 12.095 15.310 6.090 9.790 11.670 15.195 6.000 6.075 9.650 9.735 5.990 9.575 9.675 17.780 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 54 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Preset Receiver Memory Channels Broadcast Station Name CH Number Frequency
(MHz) 9.595 11.620 15.020 7.190 7.405 9.785 11.685 6.135 7.275 9.570 13.670 6.165 7.200 9.750 11.860 5.995 9.580 9.660 12.080 Name INDIA INDIA INDIA CHINA CHINA CHINA CHINA KOREA KOREA KOREA KOREA JAPAN JAPAN JAPAN JAPAN AUSTRALI AUSTRALI AUSTRALI AUSTRALI Broadcast Station Name India India India China China China China South Korea South Korea South Korea South Korea Japan Japan Japan Japan Australia Australia Australia Australia 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 CH Number 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Frequency
(MHz) 6.055 7.315 9.590 9.925 9.985 6.065 9.490 15.240 17.505 6.120 9.560 11.755 15.400 5.920 5.940 7.200 12.030 7.465 11.585 15.615 17.535 6.045 Name NIKKEI NORWAY NORWAY NORWAY NORWAY SWEDEN SWEDEN SWEDEN SWEDEN FINLAND FINLAND FINLAND FINLAND RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA ISRAEL ISRAEL ISRAEL ISRAEL INDIA Japan (Nikkei) Norway Norway Norway Norway Sweden Sweden Sweden Sweden Finland Finland Finland Finland Russia Russia Russia Russia Israel Israel Israel Israel India Reception Mode: AM i U s n g t h e M e m o r y 55 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Scanning Function Using the Scanning Function The FT1XDR/DE supports the following four scan modes:
(1) VFO Scan
(2) Memory Channel Scan
(3) Programmable Memory Channel Scan
(4) Selected Memory Channel Scan VFO Scan 1 Switch to the VFO mode, and then select a band to scan. 2 Press F and then 2 to start scanning (SCAN) toward higher frequencies. Tips When a signal is received during scanning, the decimal point blinks. Turn O clockwise: Scanning is performed toward higher fre-
quencies. Turn O counterclockwise: Scanning is performed toward lower frequencies. When a signal is received, the decimal point blinks. When a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and its frequency appears for 5 seconds. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the signal for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. The range for scanning can be selected by selecting the Set mode options [5 SCAN WIDTH]
and then [5 SCAN] . i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 56 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Canceling Scanning Using the Scanning Function To cancel scanning, press p. Tips Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press F. Press T. Turn O to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can save the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press F Press T. A-band and B-band reception frequencies A-band 0.5 MHz to 1.8 MHz
(AM BC Band) 76 (88) MHz to 108 MHz
(FM BC Band) 1.8 MHz to 30 MHz
(SW band) 30 MHz to 76 (88) MHz
(50 MHz band) B-band 108 MHz to 137 MHz 108 MHz to 137 MHz
(AIR band)
(AIR band) 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz
(VHF-TV Band) 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(INFO band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 774 (800) MHz
(UHF-TV Band) 803 (800) MHz to 999.9 MHz Cellular Blocked USA version 137 MHz to 174 MHz
(144 MHz band) 174 MHz to 222 MHz
(VHF-TV Band) 222 MHz to 420 MHz
(INFO band (1)) 420 MHz to 470 MHz
(430 MHz band) 470 MHz to 580 MHz
( ): EXP/European version For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scan-
ning Stops on page 59. Press and hold M over 1 second to select the Set mode option, and then select the following setting items for more convenient use:
[8 CONFIG] [3 BEEP] [EDGE]: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached.
[8 CONFIG] [3 BEEP] [SELECT]: Prevents a beep from being emitted when scanning stops.
[5 SCAN] [2 SCAN LAMP]: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops. Skipping a Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan (Skip Search Memory) Scanning may stop at a frequency that you do not want to receive. Such a frequency can be skipped by registering it to the [skip search memory channels]. Up to 99 frequencies can be saved in the skip search memory channels (memory channels 901 to 999). i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 57 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Scanning Function Specifying the Frequency You Do Not Want to Scan 1 Start VFO scanning. Start VFO scanning with reference to [VFO Scanning] on page 56. 2 When scanning stops at a frequency you do not want to receive, press and hold F for over 1 second. The number of the next unregistered skip search memory channel will blink. Tips Turning O allows you to specify other skip search memory channels. 3 Press F to save (register) the frequency to the skip search memory channel, and resume scanning. Tips You can register a frequency you do not want to receive to a skip search memory channel by using the following procedure in advance:
1 In the VFO mode, tune in to the frequency you do not want to scan. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second. 3 Turn O to select a skip search memory channel. 4 Press F to save (register) the frequency to the skip search memory channel. To stop scanning, press p. Deleting a Frequency Registered to the Skip Search Memory Channel The frequency registered to the skip search memory channel can be deleted in the follow-
ing procedure. After it is deleted the frequency is scanned. 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second. 3 Turn O to select a skip search memory channel from which you wish to delete the registered frequency. Select the skip search memory channel (901-999) from which the registered frequen-
cy is to be deleted. When selecting a skip search memory channel number, pressing M allows you to skip memory channel numbers in steps of 100 memory channel numbers. 4 Press H. 5 Press H to delete the registered frequency from the skip search memory channel.
[DELETE OK?] appears on the LCD. Tip To delete another frequency from the skip search memory channel, repeat steps 2 through 4. Tips Restoring the Frequency Deleted from the Skip Search Memory Channel If you have not specified a new frequency for the same memory channel, you can restore the deleted frequency by repeating steps 1 through 4. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 58 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Scanning Function Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops When scanning stops, you can select one of the following three reception methods:
(1) The signal is received for the specified period of time, and then scanning resumes. You can specify this period of time in steps of 0.5 second within the range from 2 to 10 seconds.
(2) The signal is received until it fades out. Two seconds after the signal fades out, scan-
ning resumes. [BUSY] appears on the LCD.
(3) Scanning stops and the current frequency is received. [HOLD] appears on the LCD. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 SCAN RESUME]. 5 Press H. 6 Press H again. 7 Turn O to specify the reception method. Select a reception method from [2 SEC TO 10 SEC (0.5 SEC STEP)], [BUSY], and [HOLD]. 8 Press p to save the specified reception method and exit from the Set mode.
Tips The reception method selected here is also applied to [VFO Scanning], [Programmable Memory Channel Scanning] and [Memory Channel Scanning]. The scanning restart time after BUSY (duration of signal reception) can be changed by selecting the Set mode option [5 SCAN RESTART] [3 SCAN RE-START]. Memory Channel Scanning Frequencies registered to the memory channels can be scanned in the order of memory channel number. 1 Switch to the Memory mode and recall a memory channel. 2 Press F and then 2. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory
channel numbers. When a signal is received, the decimal point blinks. When a signal is received, the decimal point blinks. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 59 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 1.53 MiB |
Using the Scanning Function Tips Turn O clockwise.: Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn O counterclockwise: Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To stop scanning, press p. Tips Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press F Press T. Turn O to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can finish the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press F Press T. When a memory channel is recalled, the regular memory channels (memory channel numbers 1-900) are scanned. When a memory bank is recalled, only the memory channels in the memory bank are scanned. For the operation to perform when scanning stops, see [Selecting a Reception Method When Scan-
ning Stops] on page 59. Press and hold M over 1 second to select the Set mode option, and then select the following setting items for more convenient use:
[8 CONFIG] [3 BEEP] [EDGE]: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached.
[8 CONFIG] [3 BEEP] [SELECT]: Prevents a beep from being emitted when scanning stops.
[5 SCAN] [2 SCAN LAMP]: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops.
[5 SCAN WIDTH] [5 SCAN]: Range for scanning can be selected. Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel You can specify two types of memory channels, a skip memory channel and a selected memory channel, for effective memory channel scanning. Skip memory channel: You can specify a memory channel that need not be scanned dur-
ing memory channel scanning. Selected memory channel: You can specify selected memory channels so that only the specific memory channels are scanned during memory scan-
ning. 1 Switch to the Memory mode, and then recall the memory channel you want to specify as a skip memory channel or a selected memory channel. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. Enters the Set mode. 3 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [5 MEMORY SKIP]. 6 Press H. 7 Turn O to select [OFF], [SKIP], or [SELECT]. 8 Press p to save the setting and exit from the Set mode. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 60 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Tips To cancel a skip/selected memory channel, select [OFF]. When it is canceled, the icon on the LCD disappears. Lights when a skip memory channel is specified Using the Scanning Function Skip memory channel
[SKP]
O OFF Selected memory channel
[SELECT]
Blinks when a select memory channel is specified Scanning Only the Selected Memory Channel 1 Switch to the Memory mode, and then recall the selected memory channel. 2 Press F and then 2. Tips Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory chan-
nel numbers. Only the selected memory channel is scanned. If a signal is received during scanning, a beep is emitted and scanning stops for 5 seconds to receive the current frequency. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To cancel scanning, press p. You can select the range for scanning by selecting [5 SCAN] [5 SCAN WIDTH] in the Set mode. Scanning a Memory Bank Only the memory channels in the recalled memory bank can be scanned. 1 Press V to enter the Memory mode. 2 Press B to enter Recall a memory bank. Pressing B each time toggles between [MEMORY NO] and [BANK (No.)]. Tips To recall another memory bank, press F and then B. 3 Turn O to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank from BANK1 through BANK 24. 4 Press B. 5 Press F and then 2. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. The selected memory bank is determined. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 61 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Scanning Function Tips Turn O clockwise: Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn O counterclockwise: Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To stop scanning, press p. You can select the range for scanning by selecting [5 SCAN] [5 SCAN WIDTH] in the Set mode. Memory Bank Link Scan BANK1 During regular memory bank scanning, only the memory channels assigned to the recalled memory bank are scanned. During memory bank link scan-
ning, memory channels registered in two or more previously specified banks can be scanned. 1 Press V to enter the Memory mode. 2 Press B to enter Recall a memory bank. 3 Press F and then B. 4 Turn O to select a memory bank. Select a memory bank subject to memory bank link scanning. 5 Press V to select a Memory bank link. The memory bank number changes from [B] to [b], indicat-
ing that the bank link has been activated 6 Repeat steps 4 to 5 to select another memory bank. 7 Press B. The memory banks subject to memory bank link scanning are determined. BANK10 BANK24 The memory bank number changes from [B] to [b]. 8 Press F and then [2]. Scanning (SCAN) is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Tips Turn O clockwise.: Scanning is performed toward higher memory channel numbers. Turn O counterclockwise: Scanning is performed toward lower memory channel numbers. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To stop scanning, press p. You can select the range for scanning by selecting [5 SCAN] [5 SCAN WIDTH] in the Set mode. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 62 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Scanning Function Canceling Bank Link Scanning 1 Press F and then B. 2 Recall the memory bank for which bank link scanning was specified. 3 Press V. The memory bank number changes from [b] to [B], indicating that the bank link has been deactivated. Programmable Memory Channel Scan (PMS) Registering to a Programmable Memory Channel 50 sets of PMS memory channels (L1/U1 to L50/U50) are available. Specify the lower limit frequency of the frequency range you want to scan for memory channel [L], and the upper limit frequency for [U]. Enter a number between 1 and 50 for . Use the same number for the lower and upper limit memory channels. Specify the lower limit frequency and upper limit frequency for the PMS memory channel
(See page 43). PMS memory channels are located next to the last memory channel. Pressing M scans PMS memory channels quickly in steps of 100 memory channels. Example: When registering the lower limit frequency 145.160 MHz and the upper limit frequency 145.460 MHz to a PMS memory channel. Lower limit frequency L1 Upper limit frequency U1 Caution When the upper and lower limit frequencies have been set in different step, be sure to set 100 kHz or more in between. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 63 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Scanning Function Performing Programmable Memory Channel Scan The programmable memory channel scan allows you to scan a specified frequency range within the same frequency band. 1 Switch to the Memory mode. Recall a PMS memory channel to which the lower limit fre-
quency or upper limit frequency is registered. 2 Press F and then 2. Programmable memory channel scanning starts. Tips Turn O clockwise: Scanning is performed toward higher fre-
quencies. Turn O counterclockwise: Scanning is performed toward lower frequencies. When a signal is received during scanning, scanning stops for 5 seconds and this frequency is received. When scanning is suspended, the decimal point blinks and the LCD stays lit. After receiving the frequency for 5 seconds, scanning resumes. To stop scanning, press p. Decimal point blinks. Tips When a skip memory channel is specified for [L] or [U] or when the lower/upper limit frequency is not properly specified, program memory channel scanning is not performed properly. Press and hold M over 1 second to select the Set mode option and then select the following setting items for more convenient use:
[8 CONFIG] [3 BEEP] [EDGE]: Emits a beep when the frequency band edge is reached.
[5 SCAN] [2 SCAN LAMP]: Prevents the LCD from being lit when scanning stops. Even during scanning, you can adjust the squelch in the following procedure:
Press F Press T Turn O to adjust the squelch. During scanning, you can finish the squelch adjustment in the following procedure:
Press F Press T. i S c a n n n g F u n c t i o n 64 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Digital GM Function
(Digital Group Monitor Function) What is the GM function?
The Digital GM (Group Monitor) Function automatically checks if there is another trans-
ceiver operating on the same frequency with the GM function within transmission range, and displays the direction, distance and other information for each detected callsign on the LCD. This convenient function not only lets you know if a friend is within transmission range, but also enables instant confirmation of position information between group mem-
bers. Furthermore, by using this function, you can send messages and images between group members. Caution The GM function does not function in the analog mode. Using the % key, switch the communication mode to AMS (Auto Mode Select Function) or digital mode. Tip When transmitting image data while GM function is active, the transmission mode automatically switches to FR mode (High Speed Data Communication Mode).The transmission mode will automatically return to the previous V/D mode (Voice/Data Simultaneous Communication Mode). Standard Operation of the GM Function Using the GM Function There are 2 ways of using the Digital GM Function.
(1) Show all stations (up to 24 stations) operating with the GM function.
(2) Register IDs of friends in a group and use it only between registered members. Displaying all stations (up to 24 stations) operating with the GM function. 1 Adjust frequency to A band. 2 Press D to open the group list. 3 Turn O to select [ALL]. 4 Press H. The ID, distance, and direction of all stations (up to 24) with-
in communication range operating with the GM function on the same frequency are displayed. If there are more than 3 stations, turn O to scroll through the display. Group List Screen When the GM function is active, not only can you verify if a station is in or out of com-
munication range but the position (direction and distance) information as well. In range Out of range Direction Distance Example of display when ALL is selected 65 Using the Digital GM FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Standard Operation of the GM Function Registering IDs of friends in a group and using GM function only between regis-
tered members Set a group with a name such as [Touring] or [Camp], and only show members registered to that group.
Group Name Example of display when Group is set For group setting and instruction on how to register members to a group, refer to the GM function instruction manual (please download it from our company website). Turning the GPS Function OFF Press D. The GM function is deactivated and the transceiver returns to the state previous to when GM function was activated. Tip With the GM function, data such as messages and images can be transmitted between members. For details, refer to the GM function instruction manual (please download it from our company website). 66 Using the Digital GM FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the APRS Function What is the APRS (Automatic Packet Reporting System)?
Although there are several functions that display position information using GPS in ama-
teur radios, the APRS is data communication system that transmits data such as position information and messages using a format proposed by Bob Bruninga of WB4APR. Upon receiving an APRS signal from the remote station, information such as direction and distance to the remote station from your station and speed of the remote station appear on the LCD of your transceiver.
Example of display when APRS signal is received The settings (initial settings) such as callsign and symbol for your station must be applied before using the APRS function. For details, refer to the APRS function instruction manual (please download it from our company website). 67 Using the APRS FunctionApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the GPS Function What is GPS?
GPS (Global Positioning System) is a space-based satellite navigation system that pro-
vides location and time information anywhere on the earth. It was developed by the U.S. Department of Defense as a military system. It receives signals from three or more of about 30 GPS satellites flying at an altitude of about 20,000 km, and displays the current position (latitude, longitude, and altitude) within a tolerance of several meters. In addition, GPS can receive the exact time from the satellites onboard atomic clock. Activating the GPS Function To activate the GPS function, select [9 APROS] [23GPS POWER], and then select
[GPS ON] in the Set mode. Tips Default: ON When the GPS function on the transceiver is turned ON, internal clock settings and posi-
tion settings for your station are automatically obtained from the GPS data. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [9 APRS]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [20 GPS POWER]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [GPS ON]. 7 Press p to set the GPS Function to ON, and exit the Set mode. Tips Tip Information about the current positions of radio stations provided by GPS can be registered to 10 memory channels (P1 to P10). Registered position information can be used to set the position of your station. When the GPS function is active, the power consumption increases by about 40 mA. As a result, the battery life is reduced by about 20% compared to when the GPS function is deactivated. To use the GPS function during APRS operation, be sure to select [9 APRS] [24MY POSITION], and then select [GPS] in the Set mode. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 68 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Method of Positioning by GPS Displaying Current Position Information of Your Station 1 Turn on the transceiver. 2 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 3 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [1 GPS POWER]. 6 Press H. 7 GPS data appears on the LCD. An arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading), your current position, number of satellites, longitude, latitude, and altitude appear on the LCD. Tips The arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) will not appear and the latitude/altitude blinks until GPS satellite data is acquired. When GPS satellite data has been acquired, the arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) will appear, the latitude/altitude will change from blinking to lit, and your current posi-
tion will be displayed. If acquisition of GPS satellite data is interrupted due to an obstacle, such as a building or tun-
nel, only the arrow icon (the direction in which you are heading) disappears. 8 Press O to scroll the screen, and display the current time. Pressing O again displays GPS data. 9. Press p. The GPS screens will transition each time H is pressed. The screen returns from the GPS screen to the normal fre-
quency display. (Not return to the transmission state) Displaying Position Information of Remote Station in Digital Mode With the V/D mode C4FM digital, because GPS position information is transmitted si-
multaneously with voice signals, the direction and position of the remote station can be displayed in real-time even while communicating. For details, see Real-Time Navigation Function on page 73. Tip Even if the GPS function of your station is set to OFF, position information of the remote station can be displayed in V/D mode. Caution If the GPS function is not active, the remote station will not be able to acquire position information for your station. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 69 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 4.13 MiB |
Method of Positioning by GPS About Positioning by GPS Positioning refers to calculation of your current position from the satellite orbit information and radio propagation time. At least three satellites need to be acquired for successful positioning. If positioning fails, move away from buildings as far as possible and stand in an area with open sky. About errors A positioning error by several hundred meters can occur due to the environmental conditions. Under favorable conditions, positioning can be performed successfully using only three satellites. However, under the following poor conditions, the positioning accuracy can decrease or positioning can fail.
- Between tall buildings
- Narrow paths between buildings
- Indoors or in close vicinity to large buildings
- Beneath bridges or high-voltage lines
- Between trees such as in forests or woods
- Inside tunnel or underground
- Usage behind heat reflective glass
- Areas with strong magnetic fields. Searching for satellites when using the GPS function for the first time each day When you use the GPS function for the first time after purchase or the first time in the day, a few minutes are required to search for satellites. Also, when using the GPS function after turning off the transceiver for several hours, a few minutes may be required to search for satellites. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 70 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Method of Positioning by GPS If it is not active, refer to page 68 and enable the GPS function. Saving GPS Information (GPS Log Function) Position information from the GPS can be saved periodically to the microSD memory card. Using the saved data and a personal computer, tracks can be displayed with commer-
cially sold map software*.
* Map software, and methods of use are not supported by YAESU. 1 Check that the GPS function is active. 2 Press M for over 1 second. 3 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [6 GPS LOG]. 6 Press H. 7 Turn O to select the interval for saving data. OFF / 1 sec / 2 sec / 5 sec / 10 sec / 30 sec / 60 sec Position information is not saved if OFF is selected. 8 Press p to enable the GPS log function and exit from the Set mode. Tip Position information will continue to be saved unless OFF is selected in step 7, shown above, or the power of the transceiver is turned off. If ON is selected again in step 7, shown above, or the power for the transceiver is turned on, position information will start being saved to a differently named file. Checking Tracks on a PC 1 Turn the transceiver off. 2 Remove the microSD. 3 Connect the microSD card to a PC using a commercially sold memory card reader. 4 Open the folder named [FT1D] within the microSD memory card. 5 Open the folder named [GPSLOG]. Data is saved with the name [GPSyymmddhhmmss.log]. The [yymmddhhmmss] part of the name represents year (yy), month (mm), day (dd), hour (hh), minute (mm), and second (ss). Tip Tracks can be displayed on a personal computer using commercially sold map software by importing the GPS data. For information on importing and using the GPS data, please refer to the operation manual for the map software being used. U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 71 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation Activating the GPS function displays the following information on the LCD. Compass:
North-UP (North is always up) Heading-UP: Heading-UP: (When B is pressed, the direction in which you are heading is always up. A white arrow icon appears. [H] ap-
pears at the lower right of the compass icon. Positioning: When at least three satellites have been acquired, appears. This icon does not appear on the LCD if the transceiver cannot acquire at least three satellites. Displays the number of acquired satellites. of Number satellites:
Latitude:
Press A to scroll the screen until the current time appears. Longitude: The current position appears using east (E) or west (S) The current position appears using north (N) or south (S) latitude. Display format: X DD MM. MMM X: X=N: North latitude, X=S: South latitude DD: Degree MM.MMM: Minute Example: N 35 38.250 (35 degrees, 38 minutes, 15 sec-
onds north latitude) longitude. Format: X DDD MM. DMMM X: X=E: East longitude, X=W: West longitude DDD: Degree MM.MMM: Minute Example: E 139 42.500 (139 degrees, 42 minutes, 30 seconds east latitude) The speed at which you are moving appears. Format: SPD aaakm/h Example: SPD 5 km/h The altitude of the current position of your radio station appears. Format: ALT aaaaam Example: ALT 20m The current time set by GPS appears. Format: aa (hour): bb (minute): cc (second) Example: 23:59:59 (23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds) is connected
* When an external GPS device time appears as to follows:
the data aa (hour): bb (minute) terminal, the Speed:
Altitude:
Time:
U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 72 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Explanation of GPS Screen and Operation Tips You can change the unit of GPS data by selecting [9 APRS] [22 GPS UNIT] in the Set mode. When the GPS function is used, the accurate time data (date and time) obtained from GPS appears on a 24 hour basis. This time data is reflected in the time data displayed on the GPS and APRS screens. You can change the geodetic system of the built-in GPS unit by selecting [9 APRS] [19 GPS DATUM] in the Set mode. However, since APRS uses the geodetic system of WGS-84, it is recom-
mended not to change it. You can set the time zone by units of 30 minutes by selecting [9 APRS] [28 TIME ZONE] in the Set mode (Default: UTC +0:00). When the GPS function is active, the power consumption increases by about 30 mA. As a result, the battery life is reduced by about 20% compared to when the GPS function is deactivated. You can obtain position information from a external GPS device by selecting [9 APRS] [17 COM PORT SETTING] and then setting [INPUT] to [GPS] in the Set mode. In this case, the data obtained from the internal GPS is disabled. When using an external GPS device, keep it away from the transceiver. Smart Navigation Function Using the Smart Navigation Function There are 2 methods of navigation with the Smart Navigation function.
(1) Real-time navigation function
(2) Backtrack function Real-Time Navigation Function GPS position information and voice signals are simultaneously transmitted in the V/D mode of C4FM digital. For this reason, the position and direction of the remote station can be displayed in real-
time even during communication. 1 Press M to open the GPS screen. 2 Turn O to select [YR]. The distance and direction to the remote station operating on the same frequency in the V/D mode is displayed. Display of remote station position Direction display Distance to remote station U s n g i t 3 Press M. The screen returns from the navigation screen to the normal frequency display. h e G P S F u n c t i o n 73 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Smart Navigation Function Backtrack Function By registering a point of departure beforehand, the distance and direction to the regis-
tered position from your current position can be displayed in real-time. Registering your current position (point of departure) (up to 3 positions can be registered) 1 Press M to open the Backtrack screen. 2 Turn O to select [MY]. 3 Press H to display the position information of your station. 4 Turn O to select a mark to register from [I], [L1], and [L1]. 5 Press H to register the position information to the select-
ed mark and return to the BACK TRACK function screen. 6 Press M to return from the backtrack screen to the normal frequency display. Using the Backtrack Function 1 Press M to open the Backtrack screen. 2 Turn O to select [I], [L1] or [L2]. Select the mark with the registered position you would like to backtrack. The registered position (departure point) is in the direction of the arrow within the circle. Walk forward so that the arrow stays pointing up on the screen. 3 Press M to return from the backtrack screen to the normal frequency display. To verify the position again, press [DISP] to open the backtrack screen. Description of the BACK TRACK Function Screen Distance to the registered position Registered position mark Direction to the registered position U s n g i t h e G P S F u n c t i o n 74 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Convenient Functions Dual Reception (DW) Function The FT1XDR/DE is equipped with the following 3 types of Dual Reception Functions:
(1) VFO Dual Reception
(2) Memory Channel Dual Reception
(3) Home Channel Dual Reception The transceiver checks the standby side signal reception over the frequency registered to the selected memory channel (Priority Memory Channel) once approximately every 5 seconds. When the transceiver detects signal reception on the standby side, it starts sig-
nal reception over the frequency registered to the selected memory channel. Even while receiving a signal over the frequency registered to a priority memory channel on the standby side, pressing p disables the Dual Reception function and allows for transmission over the former active side frequency. Example: Checking signal reception over a frequency registered to the priority memory channel [90] (standby side), while receiving signal over [145.500 MHz] (active side). Frequency over which a signal is being received. The transceiver monitors signal re-
ception over the frequency registered to the Priority Memory Channel [90]
(standby) and checks it in intervals of approximately 5 seconds. When the transceiver receives a signal over the frequency registered to the pri-
ority memory channel [90], dual recep-
tion stops and signal reception switches to [90] (standby). VFO Dual Reception VFO mode Priority memory channel 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F for over 1 second to enter the Write mode; F and the channel number blink on the LCD. 3 Turn O to select a memory channel, then press and hold B for over 1 second. P is displayed. Select a memory channel to prioritize for signal reception
(Priority Memory Channel). The P appears on the LCD. 4 Turn O to select a frequency for signal reception. Select a frequency for continual signal reception in VFO VDW is displayed. mode (active side). 5 Press F and then V to start Dial Dual Reception, and
[VDW] appears on the LCD. 6 Press V stop the Dial Dual Reception. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 75 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Dual Reception (DW) Function Memory Channel Dual Reception Memory channel Priority memory channel 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F over 1 second to enter the Write mode;F and the channel num-
P is displayed. MDW is displayed. P is displayed. HDW is displayed. ber blink on the LCD. 3 Turn O to select a memory channel and press B. Select a memory channel to prioritize for signal reception
(Priority Memory Channel) (standby side). The P appears on the LCD. 4 Select a memory channel for signal reception. Select a memory channel for signal reception at all times
(active side). 5 Press F and then V to start Memory Channel Dual Re-
ception; and [MDW] appears on the LCD. 6 Press V to stop the memory channel dual reception. Home Channel Dual Reception Home channel Priority memory channel 1 Switch to the Memory mode. 2 Press and hold F over 1 second to enter the Write mode. F and the channel number blink on the LCD. 3 Turn O to select a memory channel and press B. Select a memory channel to prioritize for signal reception
(Priority Memory Channel) (standby side). The P appears on the LCD. 4 Press F and then 4 to recall a HOME channel (active side). 5 Press F and then V. HOME Channel Dual Reception starts and [MDW] appears on the LCD. 6 Press V to turn home channel dual reception OFF. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 76 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Dual Reception (DW) Function Caution Be sure to set a memory channel as the Priority Memory Channel for standby before using this function. Tips The Priority Memory Channel is set to the Memory Channel number 1 by default. Pressing and holding M over 1 second and changing the Set mode option allows you to use this function more conveniently.
[5 SCAN] [1 DW TIME]: The interval for monitoring the Priority Memory Channel can be changed.
[5 SCAN] [4 SCAN RESUME]: The resumption conditions for Dual Reception can be changed. The combination of the frequency bands and modes of the frequency for the Priority Memory Channel
(standby side) and the frequency for continual signal reception (active side) can be freely changed. AF-DUAL Function for simultaneous signal reception over the oth-
er frequency while listening to the radio The AF-DUAL Reception Function allows reception of a radio broadcast, while standby reception of A-band or B-band frequency (or frequency registered to a memory channel) is active. When standby reception is active, voice received over that frequency cannot be heard, however if a voice signal is detected, the reception of the radio broadcast will be paused and voice will be heard. Although there is a similar function in Dual Reception
(See page 76), because a signal reception over the frequency registered to the priority memory channel is checked approximately every 5 seconds in Dual Reception, the recep-
tion for radio broadcast is interrupted every time this happens. With the AF-DUAL Recep-
tion Function, the reception of radio broadcast is interrupted only when there is a calling signal from another transceiver. Listening Radio Broadcast with AF-DUAL Reception Function 1 Set the A-band or B-band frequency (or Memory Channel/Home Channel) for stand-
by. Set the standby reception frequency for A-band or B-band (or Memory Channel/
Home Channel) to monitor for calls while receiving radio broadcast. Tips You can listen to radio broadcast while scanning the standby signal reception frequencies. Radio broadcast can be listened to while monitoring the standby signal reception frequency in the dual reception mode. 2 Press A to set the operating band to A-band. 3 Press F and then 6 to activate the AF-Dual function. 4 Press B and select [AM] or [WFM]. The broadcast band is toggled in the following order every time B is pressed:
C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s AM broadcast (middle wave band) FM broadcast AM broadcast (middle wave band) On the LCD, AM (AM broadcast) or WFM (FM broadcast) is displayed. 5 Turn O to tune in to the frequency of broadcast station. 77 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Dual Reception (DW) Function Tips For broadcast station frequencies, refer to Preset Broadcast Station Frequencies List (See page 54) or a commercially sold frequencies list. AF-DUAL reception function can be used for the radio frequency registered to the memory bank. Pressing T while a signal is being received, will switch to receiving the standby reception frequency. With the AF-DUAL Function, an A Band or B Band registered with a AM broadcast (middle wave frequency) or a FM broadcast frequency, set for standby reception, cannot be simultaneously received while listening to the radio. To disable the AF-DUAL Function, press F and then 6. The frequency registered to the standby (memory channel) appears on the LCD. Setting the resumption time of radio reception While receiving radio broadcast (active side) and ham radio band (A-band or B-band) on standby side, the transceiver may be set to resume receiving the broadcast audio [After loss of receive signal] or [After transmission]. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 AUDIO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [3 RX AF DUAL]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select reception time. Set transmission time as well. Transmission and reception for 1 second to 10 seconds, HOLD (Fixed), or transmission for 1 second to 10 seconds. Remarks Default setting: transmission and reception for 2 seconds Display Transmission and re-
ception: 1 second to 10 seconds Fixed Operation While receiving radio broadcast and ham radio band frequencies (A-band and B-band) on standby simultaneously with [AF-DUAL Reception Func-
tion], resumption of receiving radio broadcast can be set to [After loss of receive signal] or [After transmission]. For example, if 5 seconds is selected, radio reception resumes after 5 seconds after reception (or transmission) ends. While receiving radio broadcast and ham radio band frequencies (A-band and B-band) on standby simultaneously with [AF-DUAL Reception Func-
tion], the transceiver will continue to receive a signal over that frequency after signal detection without switching back to radio broadcast. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 78 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
Dual Reception (DW) Function Display Transmission: 1 sec-
ond to 10 seconds Operation
While receiving radio broadcast and ham radio band frequencies (A-band and B-band) on standby simultaneously with [AF-DUAL Reception Func-
tion], the transceiver switches signal reception to the standby upon detect-
ing it. After the user transmits signal for response and transmission ends, the transceiver switches signal reception back to radio broadcast after the specified time from the end of transmission. If a signal is received before transmitting it, [AF-DUAL Reception Function] is disabled and the transceiv-
er continually receives a signal over that frequency.
9 Press p to set the radio broadcast resumption time for reception and Transmission, and exit the Set mode.
Using the DTMF Function DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequencies) is the tone signal sent for making a call through DTMF telephone line. The maximum of 16 digit DTMF code can be registered (up to 10 channels) for telephone numbers to make a call through the public telephone line from a phone patch. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [5 DTMF SELECT]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a memory channel to register the DTMF code (1 to 10). 7 Press H. 8 Input the DTMF code with O. Tips DTMF code can also be entered with the numeric keys. To delete a code, press F. When F is pressed, a code is deleted and the cursor moves to left. 9 Press H to move the cursor. 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to enter the DTMF code. Tips The maximum of 16 digits for DTMF code can be entered. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 79 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the DTMF Function 11 Press p to set the DTMF code and exit from the Set mode. Confirming the entered DTMF code by the sound 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [4 APRS]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the memory channel to which the DTMF code was registered. 7 Press F to confirm the registered DTMF code by the audio tones. 8 Press p to exit from the Set mode. Sending the Registered DTMF Code 1 Press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 DTMF MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [AUTO]. 9 Press M. 10 Press p to set the auto dialer. 11 While pressing p key, press 1 to 0 to select the DTMF memory channel to transmit with the numeric keys. Tips The registered DTMF code is transmitted. The transmitted DTMF tone can be heard from the speaker. 12 Release p. Even if p is released, the DTMF tone signal will continue to be transmitted until trans-
mission of the signal is complete. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 80 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the DTMF Function Sending a DTMF Code Manually 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 DTMF MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [MANUAL]. 9 Press M. 10 Press p to set [MANUAL]. 11 While pressing p, select the DTMF code to transmit by pressing 1 to 0, A, B, C, , and # on the numeric keys. Tips The DTMF code selected by pressing the keys is transmitted (refer to chart below). The transmitted DTMF tone can be heard from the speaker. 12 Release p. Even if p is released, the DTMF tone signal will continue to be transmitted until trans-
mission of the signal is complete. Tips The DTMF code is a combination of 2 frequencies. 697Hz 770Hz 852Hz 941Hz 1209Hz 1 4 7 1336Hz 2 5 8 0 1477Hz 3 6 9
#
1633Hz A B C D C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 81 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Searching for signals with the signal strength graph. Band Scope Function While in VFO mode, the Band Scope Function is available that will graphically display the strength of the signals on up to 50 channels, centered on the current main band frequency. 1 Turn O to tune in to your desired center frequency. 2 Press and hold B for over 1 second. With the current frequency as the center, the strengths of any signals of each of the higher and lower 16 channels are shown on a graph. 3 Turn O to adjust the to point to any of the displayed channels, and the signal on the indicated frequency can be received. 4 Press B to exit the band scope function. Tips You can change the number of band scope channels setting by selecting [1 DISPLAY] [4 BAND SCOPE] in the Set mode. The band scope channel setting can be changed to 5 channels, 9 channels, 16 channels, 24 channels, and 50 channels, instead of 16 channels. The band scope channel interval is the same as the VFO frequency step. When band scope is active, the numeric keys will not function. The audio of A/B common frequency band can be heard simultaneously while scanning. FULL: Continualy scans(scoops). 1Time: Scans(scoops) only once. If the frequency is changed with O, scan will resume.
* FULL is only selected in the analog mode.
* 1Time is only selected in the digital mode. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s Taking picture with the optional camera mounted on speaker microphone Pictures can be taken by connecting the speaker microphone with optional camera (MH-
85A11U). Captured image data can be saved to a microSD memory card placed in the transceiver. Saved image data can be sent to another transceiver in the digital mode or using the GM function. In addition, image data can be transmitted to other transceivers* by pressing the
(Send Image Button] on the camera mounted on speaker microphone.
* Refer to the Yaesu homepage or catalog for the models of transceiver to which images can be transferred.
* Only the picture just taken can be sent to another transceiver. For methods to send other image data, refer to the GM Function instruction manual. 82 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Taking picture with the optional camera mounted on speaker microphone. Lens Aim this lrns towards the object to photograph. Do not touch the lens with fingers or other objects. Send Image Button A picture just taken can be sent. PTT Switch Press this button to transmit, and release it for reception. Speaker Sound is emitted from here. Connector Connector to connect the speaker microphone with camera to the transceiver Pay attention to the alignment of connector when connecting the speaker microphone with camera to the ranceiver. Connecting it forcibly to the transceiver may cause damage. Shutter Button Press this button to take a picture. Microphone Speak into here with a normal voice. Clip Securely clip the microphone to belt or other objects. 1 Connect the speaker microphone with camera (MH-85A11U) to the DATA terminal of the transceiver. 2 Press P to turn the transceiver on. 3 Press Point the lens towards the object to shoot and press Make sure to have at least 50cm between the lens and the object. If the object is too
. close, the picture will be out of focus, resulting in a blurred picture. Tips You can set the picture size (resolution) and image quality (compression rate) of the image, by selecting [11 OPTION] [1 USB CAMERA] in the Set mode. Captured images are saved to the microSD memory card installed in the transceiver. If your transceiver and another compatible transceiver are both in digital mode, a picture just taken may be sent to the other transceiver by pressing
. Caution Do not directly photograph objects with strong light, such as the sun or other bright objects. Such operation can lead to malfunction. If the lens or the microphone gets dirty, use a dry, soft cloth to wipe off the contaminants. Do not place the MH-85A11U near heat emitting equipment or where it is exposed to direct sunlight. Doing so can lead to fire or a malfunction. Do not drop the MH-85A11U. Applying a strong shock to the MH-85A11U may result in damages or failure. C o n v e n e n t i F u n c t i o n s 83 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Communicating with a Specific Remote Station Using the Tone Squelch Function The tone squelch opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified frequen-
cy tone is received. Use of the digital code squelch (DCS) opens the squelch only when a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. The tone squelch function mutes monitoring the communications between other stations, even when listen-
ing for a call by a specific station for a long time. 1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 SQL TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a squelch type. Select a squelch type with reference to the table shown be-
The Set mode option [11 SQL TYPE] is selected. low. 7 Press p to set the squelch type and exit the Set mode. Displays squelch type Displays logo Tips The tone squelch and DCS setting are also active during scanning. If scanning is performed with the tone squelch or the DCS function turned on, it stops only when a signal containing a tone of the speci-
fied frequency or a signal containing the specified DCS code is received. Pressing the Monitor switch allows you to hear signals that do not contain a tone or DCS code, and signals with different tones or DCS code. Pressing and holding M for 1 second, and then changing the Set mode option allows you to use this function more conveniently.
[4 SIGNALING] [3 DCS INVERSION]: Allows you to receive the DCS code of the inverted phase.
[4 SIGNALING] [10 SQL EXPANTION]: Allows you to specify different squelch types for transmis-
sion and reception respectively. Display Operation OFF TONE TONE SQL DCS REV TONE Turns off the tone sending function, tone squelch function, etc. Just sends tones ([TN] appears). Turns on the tone squelch function ([TSQ] appears). Turns on the digital code squelch ([DCS] appears). Turns on the reverse tone ([RTN] appears). Used to monitor communi-
cations based on the squelch control system in which a tone signal is contained when communication is not performed and the tone signal dis-
appears when communication starts. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 84 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Display PR FREQ PAGER (See page 90) D CD*
TONE-DCS*
D CD-TONE SQL*
Using the Tone Squelch Function Operation Turns on the no-communication squelch function for radios ([PR] ap-
pears.). You can specify no-communication signal tone frequencies within the range from 300 Hz to 3000 Hz in steps of 100 Hz. Turns on a new pager function ([PAG] appears). When using transceivers with your friends, specifying personal codes (each code is composed of two tones) allows only a specific station to be called. Sends a DCS code only in case of transmission ([DC] appears). Sends a tone signal in case of transmission, and waits for a DCS code in case of reception ([T-D] appears). Sends a DCS code in case of transmission, and waits for a tone signal in case of reception ([D-T] appears).
* Pressing and holding M over 1 second and selecting [4 SIGNALING] [10 SQL EXPANTION] and then
[ON] will add the setting items of D CD, ONE-DCS, and D CD TONESQ to [10 SQL TYPE] of the Set mode option [4 SIGNALING], allowing you to select different types of squelches for transmission and reception. Selecting a Tone Frequency You can select a tone frequency from among 50 frequencies (67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz). 1 Specify the operating frequency. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second. Enters the Set mode. 3 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [12 TONE SQL FREQ]. 6 Press H. 7 Turn O to select a tone frequency. 8 Quickly press M 3 times to save the tone frequency setting and exit the Set mode. Tips The tone frequency selected using the above-described procedure is also effective when only the tone is sent out. By default, the tone frequency is set to 88.5 Hz. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 85 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function Searching for the Frequency of the Tone Squelch Used by the Remote Station The frequency of the tone squelch used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 SQL TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [TONE SQL]. 7 Press M. 8 Turn O to select [12 TONE SQL FREQ]. 9 Press H. 10 Receive the signal from the remote station. 11 Press and hold B over 1 second. 12 Release B. Search for the tone frequency starts. When a corresponding tone frequency is detected, a beep is emitted and search stops temporarily. The detected tone frequency blinks. Tip To set the searched tone frequency and exit from the Set mode:
Press B a beep is emitted. Quickly press M 3 times.
[TONE SEARCH] appears. Tip For the operation to perform when scan stops, refer to Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 59. Selecting a DCS Code You can select a DCS code from among 104 DCS codes (023 to 754). 1 Specify the operating frequency. 2 Press and hold M over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 3 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [2 DCS CODE]. 6 Press H. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 86 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function 7 Turn O to select a DCS code. 8 Quickly press M 3 times to set the DCS code and exit from the Set mode. Tip By default, the DCS code is set to [023]. Searching for the Frequency of the DCS Used by the Remote Station The DCS code used by the remote station can be searched for and displayed. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 SQL TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [DCS]. Sets the DCS. 7 Press M. 8 Turn O to select [2 DCS CODE]. 9 Press H. 10 Receive the signal from the remote station. 11 Press and hold B over 1 second. 12 Release B. Searching for the DCS code begins. When a correspond-
ing DCS code is heard, a beep is emitted and search stops temporarily. The found DCS code blinks. Tip To set the searched DCS code:
[DCS SEARCH] appears. Press B a beep is emitted. Quickly press M 3 times to set the DCS code and exit from the Set mode. Tip To perform the operation when scan stops, refer to Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page 59. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 87 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function Notification of Call from the Remote Station by Vibration of the Vibrator Set the vibrator to alert you of a call from a remote station containing a corresponding CTCSS tone or DCS code. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [22 VIBRATOR]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [SIGNALING]. 9 Press p to set the Vibrator mode and exit the Set mode. Tip To turn off the Vibrator function, select [OFF] in step 7. Tips The vibrator function can be set for all frequency bands belonging to A-band (Main) and B-band (Sub). Selecting [8 CONFIG] [22 VIBRATOR] [MODE] and then [BUSY] for [MODE] in the Set mode will cause the vibrator to start vibrating when the BUSY LED lights upon reception of a signal. If the BUSY state is not held continuously over 5 seconds, the sus-
pended state is canceled. If the p switch is operated to change the communication mode from transmission to reception when the vibrator is turned ON, the vibrator function is turned off for 5 sec-
onds. Selecting Vibrator Operation Mode Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [22 VIBRATOR]. 5 Press H. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 88 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function 6 Turn O to select [SELECT]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select a vibrator operation mode. Remark Default: MODE1 The vibrator vibrates continuously. The vibrator operates at long intervals. The vibrator operates at short intervals. MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 9 Press p. Sets the Vibrator mode and exits from the Set mode. Notification of a Call from a Remote Station by the Bell Set the Bell sound and the blinking b icon on the LCD, to alert you of a call from a remote station containing a corresponding CTCSS tone or DCS code. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 BELL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [SELECT]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [BELL]. When the tone squelch or DCS function is turned on, the b
icon appears. 9 Press p to set the bell function and exit Set mode. Tip To turn off the bell function, select [OFF] in step 6. Tips To use the bell function, turn on the tone squelch or DCS function. The bell function cannot be used via the repeater. The b icon appears when the bell function is turned on. Upon receipt of a signal from a remote station, the b icon blinks. Changing the Number of Times the Bell Rings Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 89 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function 4 Turn O to select [1 BELL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [RINGER]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select the number of times the bell rings. Remark Default: Once Tip You can select the number of times the bell rings from among 1 to
20 times, or continuous. 9 Press p to set the selected number of times the bell rings and exit from the Set mode. Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function When using the transceivers with your friends, specifying personal codes (each code composed of two CTCSS tones) allows you to call only a specific station. Even if the called person is not near his or her transceiver, the information on the LCD indicates that he or she has been called. A B C Im going to call Mr. B. Ring, ring, ring Three persons A, B, and C are using the transceiver. Mr. C sends the personal code of Mr. B. Only Mr. B is called. Flow of Operation to Use the Pager Function Set the same code as that of the remote station. Determine a frequency. Perform transmission/reception. Confirm reception according to the information on the LCD and the bell sound. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 90 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function Setting the Code of Your Station Set the personal code (your code) to be called by other stations. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [6 PAGER]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [CODE-RX]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select a code. Select the first code from among 1 to 50. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select a code. Select the second code from among 1 to 50. The cursor [] moves. Caution The second code must be different from the first code. 11 Press p to set your station code and exit from the Set mode. Tips Default: 05 47 The first and second codes contained in your personal code may be reversed, i.e., [47 05] from [05 47] but recognized as the same code. If the same personal code (group code) is specified for all per-
sons, all persons can be called at the same time. Turning on the New Pager Function Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 SQL TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [PAGER]. 7 Press p to set the new pager function and exit from the Set mode. You can make a call, or wait for a call from a remote station, using the new pager function. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 91 PAG appears. Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function Calling a Specific Station Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 SQL TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [PAGER]. Set the new pager function:
7 Press M. 8 Turn O to select [6 PAGER]. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select [CODE-TX]. 11 Press H. 12 Turn O to select the code of the remote station. Select the first code of the remote station. Caution Register the pager code of the remote station in advance. The cursor [] moves. 13 Press H. 14 Turn O to select the code of the remote station. Select the second code of the remote station. 15 Press p to set the code of the remote station and exit from the Set mode. 16 Press p to call the remote station. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 92 PAG appears. Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Using the Tone Squelch Function Being Called by the Remote Station (Standby Operation) If you use the new pager function on the same frequency as the remote station, the [PAG]
icon displayed on the LCD changes to [PIN], alerting that you have been called by the remote station. In addition, if you turn on the bell function (See page 89), you can con-
firm a call from the remote station by the [PAG] display, the blinking [b] icon, and the bell sound. Also, if you turn on the vibrator function (See page 88), the vibrator will confirm a call from the remote station. Blinks When called Tip Selecting [4 SIGNALING] [9 PAGER ANS-BACK] [ON] in the Set mode automatically places the transceiver in the transmission mode (for about 2.5 seconds) when called by the remote party, and noti-
fies the remote party to get ready for communication. C o m m u n c a t i n g w i i t h a S p e c i f i c R e m o t e S t a t i o n 93 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Functions Used As Needed Set Mode Using the Set Mode The Set mode allows you to select various functions from a list so you can use your transceiver more conveniently. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select a Set mode option. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to choose a setting item. Select a setting item:
5 Press H.
[If there is no lower layer of setting items Proceed to step 8.]
[If there is lower layer of setting items continue with step 6.]
6 Turn O to select a setting item. 7 Press p to exit the Set mode. Set mode option No. Set mode option Setting item Resetting the Set Mode Options The Set mode options you have set can be restored to the defaults by following the procedure described below. However, to restore the following setting items to the defaults, ALL RESET (See page 39) is required. 2-1-2 ANTENNA ATT 2-1-4 RX MODE 3-3 MEMORY NAME 4-2 DCS CODE 4-6 PAGER (CODE-RX/CODE-TX) 4-9 SQL S-METER 4-12 TONE SQL FREQ 8-5 CLOCK TYPE 8-15 RPT SHIFT 9-7 APRS MSG TXT 9-18 DIGI PATH 9-24 MY POSITION 12 CALLSIGN 2-1-3 HALF DEVIATION 3-2 BANK NAME 3-5 MEMORY SKIP 4-3 DCS INVERSION 4-7 PR FREQUENCY 4-11 SQL TYPE 7-4 EDIT CATEGORY TAG 8-12 PASSWORD 8-16 RPT SHIFT FREQ 9-15 BEACON STATS TXT 9-23 CALLSIGN (APRS) 9-25 MY SYMBOL (4:User) F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 94 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Then turn the transceiver on. When a beep is heard, release the keys. 1 Press % while pressing V, and P. 2 When [SET MODE RESET PUSH F KEY] appears, press F. A beep is emitted. Tip To cancel resetting, press any key other than F. Set Mode Set Mode Option List Set mode option No./
setting Item Description of function Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) Reference page 1 DISPLAY 1-1 GPS INFO Press H to open the GPS screen. 11ch / 19ch / 33ch / 49ch / 101ch 1-5 LAMP 1-3 COMPASS HEADING UP / NORTH UP 1-4 BAND SCOPE COMPASS / NUMERIC 1-2 TARGET LOCATION Set the display method for the BACKTRACK screen that ap-
pears when using the GM Func-
tion. Set the display method for BACK-
TRACK Compass. Switch the Search Channel for the BAND SCOPE operation mode. Set the duration time of backlight and keys to be lit. Select Japanese or English as the display language for Set mode options, setting items, etc. Set the LCD contrast level. Set the brightness level of the LCD backlight and keypad key light. Select an opening message type. NORMAL / OFF / DC /
MESSAGE / CALLSIGN Voltage & Temperature 1-7 LCD CONTRAST 1-8 LCD DIMMER 1-9 OPENING MESSAGE OFF / 2 to 10 SEC (KEY) /
CONTINUOUS KEY 5sec JAPANESE / ENGLISH 1-10 SENSOR INFO 1-6 LANGUAGE Display function for electrical volt-
age and temperature. LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 15 Level 7 LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 6 Level 6 1-11 S-METER SYMBOL Select a S/PO meter symbol dis-
play type. 4 types 2 TX / RX 2-1 MODE 2-1-1 ANTENNA AM 2-1-2 ANTENNA ATT 2-1-3 HALF DEVIATION Set the transmission modulation Select an AM radio antenna type. BAR & EXT / Bar Antenna Set the attenuator to ON or OFF. OFF / ON OFF / ON 2-1-4 RX MODE 2-2 DIGITAL 2-2-1 DIGITAL MODE level. Select a reception mode. Select DIGITAL to switch to DIGI-
TAL mode AUTO / FM / AM MODE: DIGITAL / AMS / ANALOG DIG TX: DN / VW AMS MODE: TX M / TX FM /
TX DN / TX VW / AUTO 103 104 104 105 105 106 106 107 107 108 109 33 109 110 38 111 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 95 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 2-2-4 LOCATION SERVICE 2-2-5 STANDBY BEEP 2-2-6 DSP Ver 2-3 AUDIO 2-3-1 MIC GAIN 2-3-2 MUTE 2-3-3 RX AF DUAL Set Mode Set mode option No./
setting Item 2-2-2 SQL TYPE Description of function Select SQL Type in the DIGITAL mode. 2-2-3 DIGI POP UP Set the POP UP time. Set whether or not to display the current location of your own sta-
tion in the digital mode. STANDBY BEEP setting DSP version display Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) SQL TYPE: OFF / CODE /
BREAK Reference page 113 CODE: 001 to 126 OFF BND2s / BND4s / BND6s /
BND8s / BND10s / BND20s /
BND30s / BND60s / BNDCNT ON / OFF
* For more details of this function, refer to 113 the GM Function Instruction Manual. ON / OFF Version display 114 115 Adjust the microphone gain level. LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 9 LEVEL 5 OFF / MUTE30% / MUTE50% /
Set the muting level on the non-
operating side when a signal is MUTE 100%
received on the operating band side. Set the resumption time of radio reception in the AF Dual mode. Transmission and reception 1 second to 10 seconds, Fixed, or transmission 1 second to 10 sec-
onds. Transmission 2 seconds NORMAL / AUTO BACK BANK 1 to BANK 24, BANK LINK ON / OFF 2-3-4 VOL MODE 3 MEMORY 3-1 BANK LINK Set v key. Set memory bank link. 3-2 BANK NAME 3-3 MEMORY NAME 3-4 MEMORY PROTECT Allow or prohibit memory channel Assign a name to a memory bank. BANK1 to BANK24 Up to 16 characters Enter a memory channel tag. OFF / ON 3-5 MEMORY SKIP 3-6 MEMORY WRITE registration. Set memory channels or selected memory channels to skip. Set the automatic increment to display memory channel to be registered. OFF / SKIP / SELECT NEXT / LOWER 4 SIGNALING 4-1 BELL Set the number of bell ring. 4-2 DCS CODE Set the DCS code. SELECT: OFF / BELL RINGER: 1 time to 20 times /
Continuous DCS 023 to DCS 754 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 96 115 35 78 116 117 49 47 118 60 118 89 86 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set mode option No./
setting Item 4-3 DCS INVERSION Description of function Select a combination of DCS in-
version codes in terms of commu-
nication direction. Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) RX (Reception):
-NORMAL (Homeomorphic) /
INVERT (Inversion) /
BOTH (Both Phase) /
NORMAL (Homeomorphic) TX (Transmission):
-NORMAL (Homeomorphic) /
NORMAL (Homeomorphic) NORMAL (Homeomorphic) INVERT (Inversion) 4-4 DTMF MODE 4-5 DTMF SELECT 4-6 PAGER 4-7 PR FREQUENCY 4-8 SQL LEVEL 4-9 SQL S-METER 4-10 SQL EXPLANATION 4-11 SQL TYPE 1 to 10 750ms / 1000ms SPEED: 50ms / 100ms MODE: MANUAL / AUTO DELAY: 50ms / 250ms / 450ms /
Set the transmission of DTMF code registered to a DTMF mem-
ory channel, DTMF code trans-
mission delay time, and DTMF code transmission speed. Set a DTMF auto dialer channel and code (16 characters). Turn on/off the pager answerback function and specify a personal code (transmission/reception). Set a non-communication squelch. Select a squelch level. Select an S-meter squelch level. OFF / LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 9 Set a separate squelch type for reception and transmission. Select a squelch type. ANS-BACK: OFF / ON CODE-RX: 01 02 to 50 49 05 47 CODE-TX: 01 02 to 50 49 05 47 300 Hz to 3000 Hz 1600 Hz Level 0 to Level 15 Level 1 OFF / ON 4-12 TONE SQL FREQ Set a tone frequency. 4-13 TONE-SRCH Set the audio output during tone search. Turn the muting function on/off and select a tone search speed. Enables/Disables Alert Feature. the Weather Set the priority memory channel monitoring interval. Set the scan lamp to light or not when scanning stops. Set the scanning restart time. Set the scan stop mode. 4-14 WX ALERT 5 SCAN 5-1 DW TIME 5-2 SCAN LAMP 5-3 SCAN RE-START 5-4 SCAN RESUME OFF / TONE / TONE SQL / DCS /
REV TONE / PR FREQ / PAGER 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz 100 Hz MUTE: ON / OFF SPEED: FAST / SLOW OFF / ON 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC 5 SEC ON / OFF 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC 2 SEC SCAN:
BUSY / HOLD / 2sec to 10sec 5sec DW:
BUSY / HOLD / 2sec to 10sec 5-5 SCAN WIDTH Set the scan mode. VFO: ALL / BAND MEMORY: ALL CH / BAND Set Mode Reference page 119 81 79 90 120 121 121 122 84 85 123 124 124 125 125 59 126 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 97 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Set mode option No./
setting Item 6 GM 6-1 LANGUAGE Description of function Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) Reference page Select the language to use for writing a message, etc. Delete a registered group. 6-2 DELETE GROUP 6-3 DELETE MEMBER Delete a registered member. 6-4 RADIO ID Transceiver specific number(ID) appears. (This cannot be edited) JAPANESE ENGLISH
* For more details of this function, refer to the GM Function Instruction Manual. 7 WIRES-X 7-1 LANGUAGE Select the language to use for writing a message, etc. 7-2 RPT/WIRES FREQ Set a frequency to be used for Re-
JAPANESE ENGLISH MANUAL / PRESET 7-3 SERCH SETUP 7-4 EDT CATEGORY TAG peater/WIRES. Set the WIRES ROOM selection method. Edit a category tag. HISTORY / ACTIVITY C1 to C5 7-5 REMOVE ROOM/
NODE Delete a ROOM. registered Category C1 to C5
* For more details of this function, refer to the WIRES-X Function Instruction Manual. 8 CONFIG 8-1 APO Set the APO operating time. 8-2 BCLO 8-3 BEEP 8-4 BUSY LED Turn on/off the busy channel lock-
out function. Set the beep output function and the function of emitting a beep when a band edge/CH1 is en-
countered. Turn on/off the BUSY LED. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 8-5 CLOCK TYPE 8-6 GPS LOG Set the clock shift function. Set the GPS access time. 8-7 HOME VFO 8-8 LED LIGHT 8-9 LOCK ENABLE/DISABLE of VFO trans-
mission in Home Channel. Turn on/off the white LED flash-
light. Select a lock mode. 8-10 MONI/T-CALL 8-11 TIMER Select a monitor switch or T-CALL switch. Set the power ON/OFF timer. OFF / 0.5 HOUR /
1 HOUR to 12 HOURS OFF / ON SELECT:
KEY&SCAN / KEY / OFF EDGE: OFF / ON A BAND: ON / OFF B BAND: ON / OFF RADIO: ON / OFF A / B OFF / 1 SEC / 2 SEC / 5 SEC /
10 SEC / 30 SEC / 60 SEC ENABLE / DISABLE KEY&DIAL / PTT / KEY&PTT /
DIAL&PTT / ALL / KEY / DIAL MONI / T-CALL *1 ON: 00:00 to 23:59 ON / OFF OFF: 00:00 to 23:59 ON / OFF 127 128 128 129 129 130 130 131 131 132 132 133 8-12 PASSWORD Turn on/off the password function. ON / OFF [ ]
98
*1: Depends on the transceiver version. Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Reference page 134 Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) OFF / 20ms / 50ms / 100ms /
200ms ON / OFF Set mode option No./
setting Item Description of function 8-13 PTT DELAY Set the PTT delay time. 8-14 RPT ARS 8-15 RPT SHIFT 8-16 RPT SHIFT FREQ Select a repeater shift width. 8-17 SAVE RX Set the reception save time. Turn the ARS function on/off. Select a repeater shift direction. Differs depending on frequency Differs depending on frequency OFF / 0.2 SEC (1:1) to 60.0 SEC
(1:300) AUTO / 5.0 kHz to 100 kHz Select a channel step. 8-18 STEP 8-19 DATE & TIME ADJ Set up the built-in clock function. 8-20 TOT 8-21 VFO MODE Set the timeout timer. Select the frequency selection range in the VFO mode. Select a vibrator mode and set up the vibrator function. 8-22 VIBRATOR 9 APRS 9-1 APRS AF DUAL 9-2 APRS DESTINATION 9-3 APRS FILTER Turn on/off the muting function when both the APRS function and AF dual function are active. Displaying Model Code Select filter function OFF / 30 SEC to 10 MIN 3.0min ALL / BAND MODE:
SELECT:
OFF / BUSY / SIGNALING MODE1 / MODE2 / MODE3 ON / OFF APY01D (Cannot be edited.) Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: OFF / ON ALTNET: OFF / ON OFF / 1200bps / 9600bps MSG:
OFF / 2-4-10 (2sec interval) /
20sec / 30sec / 60sec /
CONTINUOUS /
EVERY 2s-10s (1sec interval) /
EVERY 10s-EVERY 50s
(10sec interval) / EVERY 1m-EVERY 10m (1min interval) GRP:
BLN:
OFF / 2-4-10 (2sec interval) /
20sec / 30sec / 60sec /
CONTINUOUS OFF / 2-4-10 (2sec interval) /
20sec / 30sec / 60sec /
CONTINUOUS 134 135 135 136 37 34 136 137 88 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 99 9-4 APRS MODEM 9-5 APRS MSG FLASH Set the strobe to flash when there Set the APRS baud rate is an incoming message. Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 3.92 MiB |
Set Mode Set mode option No./
setting Item Description of function Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) Reference page 9-6 APRS MSG GROUP Set group filter for receiving mes-
sages. 9-7 APRS MSG TXT 9-8 APRS MUTE 9-9 APRS POPUP Enter standard message text 1 to 7ch Turn on/off the B-band AF muting function when APRS is set. Set such as a beacon type, mes-
sage type and time for pop-up display. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 100 G1: ALL******
G2: CQ*******
G3: QST******
G4: YAESU****
G5:
B1: BLN******
B2: BLN*
B3: BLN*
1 to 8 ch ON / OFF Mic-E:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s POSITION:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s WEATHER:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s OBJECT:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s ITEM:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s STATUS:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s OTHER:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s MY PACKET:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s MSG:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Set mode option No./
setting Item 9-9 APRS POPUP Description of function Set the beacon type, the message type and the time of the popup display. Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) GRP:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s BLN:
OFF / ALL2s to ALL60s /
ALLCNT / BND2s to BND60s /
BNDCNT ALL10s MY MSG:
OFF / BND2s to BND60s /
BND10s DUP.BCN:
OFF / BND2s to BND60s /
BND10s DUP.MSG:
OFF / BND2s to BND60s /
BND10s ACK.REJ:
OFF / BND2s to BND60s /
OTHER MSG:
OFF / BND2s to BND60s /
BND10s BND10s 9-10 APRS RINGER Turn on/off the bell when a bea-
con is received. Mic-E: ON / OFF POSITION: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF STATUS: ON / OFF OTHER: ON / OFF MY PACKET: ON / OFF MSG: ON / OFF GRP: ON / OFF BLN: ON / OFF MY MSG: ON / OFF DUP.BCN: ON / OFF DUP.MSG: ON / OFF ACK.REJ: ON / OFF OTHER MSG: ON / OFF TX BCN: ON / OFF TX MSG: ON / OFF 9-11 APRS UNIT Select the units for APRS display. Position: MM.MM' / MM'SS'
Distance: km / mile Speed: km/h / knot / mph Altitude: m / ft Temp: C / F Rain: mm / inch Wind: m/s / mph 9-12 APRS TX DELAY Set the data sending delay time. 100ms / 150ms / 200ms /
250ms / 300ms / 400ms /
500ms / 750ms / 1000ms Reference page F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 101 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Set mode option No./
setting Item 9-13 BEACON INFO Description of function Set the transmission beacon in-
formation. 9-14 BEACON INTERVAL Set a beacon automatic sending interval. 9-15 BEACON STATS TXT Input setting for status text. 9-16 BEACON TX 9-17 COM PORT SETTING Select automatic or manual send-
ing of beacon. Set the COM port. 9-18 DIGI PATH Select a digital repeater route. 9-19 GPS DATUM Select a datum used for the GPS function. Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) Reference page AMBIGUITY:
OFF / 1 dig to 4dig SPD / CSE: ON / OFF ALTITUDE: ON / OFF 30sec / 1min / 2min / 3min /
5min / 10min / 15min / 20min /
30min / 60min S.TXT: ON / OFF TX RATE: 1/1 to 1/8 1 to 5 CH AUTO / MANUAL / SMART STATUS: ON / OFF SPEED:
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 INPUT: OFF / GPS OUTPUT: OFF / GPS / WAY.P WAYPOINT:
NMEA9 / NMEA6 / NMEA7 /
NMEA8 Mic-E: ON / OFF POSIT: ON / OFF WEATHER: ON / OFF OBJECT: ON / OFF ITEM: ON / OFF P1 OFF P2 1 WIDE1-1 P3 1 WIDE1-1 / 2 WIDE2-1 P4 1 / 2 P5 1 / 2 P6 1 / 2 P7 1 / 2 P8 1 to 8 WGS-84 / Tokyo Mean /
Tokyo Japan / Tokyo Korea /
Tokyo Okinawa GPS ON / GPS OFF AUTO / MANUAL Speed: km/h / Knot / mph Altitude: m / ft LON* ****.**'
P1 to P10 45 Icon F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 9-20 GPS POWER 9-21 GPS TIME SET 9-22 GPS UNIT Turn on/off the GPS function. Turn on/off the GPS time and date automatic acquisition function. Select the units for GPS display. Position: .MMM' / 'SS''
9-23 CALLSIGN (APRS) Specify the callsign of your sta-
9-24 MY POSITION tion. Set the position for your station. GPS / Lat N * ****.**' /
9-25 MY SYMBOL Set the symbol for your station. 102 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set mode option No./
setting Item 9-26 POSITION COMMENT Description of function Set up the position comment func-
tion. 9-27 SmartBeaconing Set the smart beaconing function. STATUS:
Set Mode Setting Item
(Bold letters: Default) Reference page Off Duty / En Route /
In Service / Returning /
Committed / Special / Priority /
Custom 0 to 6 / EMERGENCY!
OFF / TYPE1 / TYPE2 / TYPE3 LOW SPD: 2mph to 30mph HIGH SPD: 31mph to 90mph SLOW RATE: 1min to 100min FAST RATE: 10sec to 180sec TURN ANGL: 5 to 90 TURN SLOP: 1 to 255 TURN TIME: 5sec to 180sec UTC 13.0 H / UTC+0:00 Set the time zone. 9-28 TIME ZONE
* For more details of functions, refer to the APRS Section in the instruction manual. 10 SD CARD 10-1 BACKUP Write to SD / Read from SD 10-2 MEMORY CH 10-3 GROUP ID 10-4 FORMAT 11 OPTION 11-1 USB CAMERA the information Write or read about your transceiver into or from the micro SD memory card. Write or read the memory channel information into or from the micro SD memory card. Write or read GROUP ID infor-
mation into or from the micro SD memory card. Format the micro SD memory card. Set the USB CAMERA image size and resolution. Write to SD / Read from SD Write to SD / Read from SD Format SIZE: 160120 / 320240 QUALITY: LOW / NORMAL /
HIGH 12 CALLSIGN Set the CALLSIGN. Displaying the GPS screen. When using the GPS function, you can display the GPS information on the LCD. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 GPS INFO]. 5 Press H to display the GPS information on the LCD. 138 138 139 24 140 141 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 103 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the display method of the remote station information Set the display method of the remote station information when using the GM Function. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 TARGET LOCATION]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the display method. COMPASS: Compass appears. NUMERIC: Longitude and latitude appear. 7 Press p to set the selected display method, and exit from the Set mode. Caution When the NUMERIC is selected, only the location information of the remote station appears on the LCD. The BACKTRACK function is not activated. Setting the display method for BACKTRACK You can set the BACKTRACK screen display method. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 COMPASS]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the display method. HEADING UP: Heading direction is indicated upward. NORTH UP: North direction is indicated upward. 7 Press p to save the selected display setting and exit the set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 104 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the search channels for the BAND SCOPE function You can set the number of channels to be displayed for the band scope when the BAND SCOPE function is used. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 BAND SCOPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the number of channels to search for. 11ch / 19ch / 33ch / 49ch / 101ch Remark Default: 33ch 7 Press p to set the number of channels to search for, and exit the Set mode. Changing the Lighting Condition You can change the LCD and key lighting condition. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [5 LAMP]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a lighting condition. Select a lighting condition with reference to the following table:
Display 2 SEC (KEY) to 10 SEC (KEY) CONTINUOUS OFF Lighting Condition When O dial or a key is pressed, the LCD and keys light up for the set time. The LCD and keys light up continuously. The LCD and keys do not light.
Remark Default: Key, 5 seconds 7 Press p to save the lighting condition, and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 105 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Selecting a Display Language You can select a display language from Japanese and English. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [6 LANGUAGE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a language. Select [JAPANESE] or [ENGLISH]. Remark Default: Japanese 7 Press p to save the selected display language, and exit the Set mode. Adjusting the LCD Contrast Level You can adjust the LCD contrast level. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [7 LCD CONTRAST]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a contrast level. Select from among LEVEL 1 (LIGHT) to LEVEL 15 (DARK). Remark Default: LEVEL 7 7 Press p to save the selected contrast, and exit the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 106 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Adjusting the LCD Backlight and Keypad Key Light Brightness Level You can adjust the brightness level of the LCD backlight and keypad key light. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [8 LCD DIMMER]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a brightness level. You can select from LEVEL 1 (DARK) to LEVEL 6 (BRIGHT).
Remark Default: LEVEL 6 7 Press p to save the selected display brightness level, and exit the Set mode.
Changing the Opening Message Displayed Immediately after Power-on You can select the message displayed under the YAESU logo from among four types:
no message, power supply voltage, message comprising up to 16 characters, and callsign. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [9 OPENING MESSAGE]. 5 Press H. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 107 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 6 Turn O to select the display method. Select a message type with reference to the following table:
Remark Default: CALLSIGN Display NORMAL OFF DC MESSAGE CALLSIGN Display Condition The YAESU logo appears immediately after power-on. Immediately after power-on, the reception frequency, etc. appear without display-
ing an opening message. The power supply voltage and time appear immediately after power-on. A message comprising up to 16 characters ap-
pears immediately after power-on. Pressing H displays the message registration screen. Enter a message to be displayed following the procedure described in Assigning a Name to a Memory Channel (See page 47). Your callsign appears immediately after power-on. 7 Press p to save the selected display method, and exit from the Set mode. Measuring the Battery Voltage and the Transceiver Temperature Power Supply Voltage Measurement Function/Temperature Measurement Function You can measure the battery voltage and the temperature inside the transceiver. When the optional external power supply adapter with a cigarette plug (SDD-13) is connected, the power supply voltage of this adapter is measured. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [10 SENSOR INFO]. 5 Press H.
The voltage and temperature appear on the LCD. Remark When the temperature appears on the LCD, pressing V toggles the unit of temperature display between C and F.
7 Press M. 8 Press p to exit from the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 108 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Tips The display changes as follows depending on the type of the power supply used. Battery pack: Lit Battery case: Dry External power supply adapter: Ext During mono band reception, the voltage can be displayed on the LCD constantly (See page 27). This function displays the temperature inside the transceiver. In a situation where the temperature inside of the transceiver does not rise (e.g., standby reception), you can know the approximate outside temperature from the temperature displayed on the LCD. Changing the Display Pattern of the PO Meter You can select a display pattern of the S/PO meter from among four types. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [1 DISPLAY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 S-METER SYMBOL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a display pattern.
/
/
/
Remark Default:
/
7 Press p to save the selected display pattern, and exit from
/
/
the Set mode. Switching between AM Antennas You can switch antennas when listening to AM broadcast stations. For details, see Switching between AM Antennas on page 33. Reducing receiver sensitivity Attenuator (ATT) Function If the signal from the remote station is too strong or, a strong signal is present nearby that interferes with reception, use the attenuator (ATT) function. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 109 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 4 Turn O to select [1 MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [2 ANTENNA ATT]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [ON]. Remark Default: OFF 9 Press p to save the attenuator function setting, and exit the Set mode. Tip The amount of attenuation by the attenuator (ATT) is about 10 dB. Setting the transmission modulation level You can set the transmission modulation level to half of its usual level. Set [OFF] for normal amateur operation. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [3 HALF DEVIATION]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [ON]
9 Press p to save the transmission modulation level is set, Remark Default: OFF and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 110 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Changing the mode manually Manually switch to an optimum mode (radio wave type) according to the frequency band. For more details, see Changing the Mode Manually on page 38. Set Mode Switching between digital and analog mode You can set digital and analog mode switching and digital transmission mode. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [1 DIGITAL MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [MODE]. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select your desired mode. DIGITAL: Transmit and receive in the digital mode. ANALOG: Transmit and receive in the analog mode. AMS (Automatic Mode Select):
Tune to the transmission and reception mode of the remote station from which a signal is automatically received. 11 Press M. 12 Turn O to select [DIGI TX]. 13 Press H. 14 Turn O to select a reception mode. DN: Usual digital communication mode. Conversation is infrequently interrupted even under low power level. VW: (Voice Wide) Full rate high quality sound mode This is the transmission function to prioritize the sound quality when the communication condition of the remote station is relatively good. 15 Press p to save the setting and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 111 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the AMS transmission mode When operating in the AMS function, the transmit mode may be selected:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [1 DIGITAL MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [AMS MODE]. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select the AMS transmit mode. TX M: The operating mode is automatically selected from four communication modes to match the received signal. Pressing the Microphone [PTT]
momentarily, toggles between the Digital and Analog communication modes. TX FM: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the FM mode. TX DN: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the DN mode. TX VW: The RX mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. The TX mode is automatically changed to the VW mode. AUTO: The RX and TX operating mode is automatically selected from the four communication modes to match the received signal. Remarks Default: TX M Blink : TX M Blink OO : TX FM / TX DN / TX VW The OO symbol display differs according to the received signal. 11 Press p to save the setting and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 112 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the squelch type for the digital mode You can set the squelch type for the digital mode. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [2 SQL TYPE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [SQL TYPE]. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select a squelch type. OFF: Voice is always output upon receiving a digital signal from a Yaesu transceiver. CODE: Voice is output only when receiving a signal with a corresponding SQL CODE. BREAK: Voice is output regardless of any squelch code when the remote station transmits with BREAK set. 11 Press M. 12 Turn O to select [SQL CODE]. 13 Press H. 14 Turn O to enter a code. You can enter SQL CODE of 126 types from 001 to 126. 15 Press p to save the SQL CODE setting and exit the Set mode. Setting the pop up time of the remote station information You can set the time duration to display the remote station information, such as callsign, on the LCD. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 113 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 6 Turn O to select [3 DIGI POPUP]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select the display method. OFF: Does not display the remote station information. BND2s to 60s: Set the time to display the remote station information (2 to 60 seconds). BNDCNT: Always display the remote station information. Remark Default: 10 seconds 9 Press p to save the pop up time setting and exit the Set mode. Setting the Standby Beep When communicating in a digital mode, a beep is sounded after the end of the other stations transmission. 1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [5 STANDBY BEEP]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [OFF]/[ON]. OFF: Disable the STANDBY BEEP feature. ON: Enable the STANDBY BEEP feature. Remark Default: ON 9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 114 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Displaying the version of the DSP program You can check the DSP program version of the built in digital unit of the transceiver. First enter the digital mode, and then enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 DIGITAL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [6 DSP Ver]. 7 Press H. 8 Press p to exit from the Set mode. The version of the DSP program appears on the LCD. Adjusting the microphone sensitivity Microphone Gain You can adjust the input level of the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 AUDIO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [1 MIC GAIN]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select a microphone sensitivity level. Select a microphone gain level from the following:
LEVEL 1 (Lowest sensitivity) to LEVEL 9 (Highest sensitivity) Remark Default: LEVEL 5
9 Press M twice. The selected microphone gain level is set. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d
115 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 10 Press p to exit the Set mode. Tips Increasing the microphone gain excessively can distort the sound or pick up the surrounding noise, impairing intelligibility. Be sure to adjust the microphone gain whenever you change microphones. Muting Voice In the dual reception mode, the audio being received on the non-operating band is muted when a signal is herd on the operating band. For more details, see Muting Audio on page 35. Simultaneously radio broadcast reception Set the mute time of the simultaneous broadcast reception. For more details, see AF-DUAL Function for simultaneously monitoring the amateur frequency while listening to the broadcast radio. Changing the sound volume setting method You can set the sound volume adjustment mode to be automatically canceled after about 3 seconds, after pressing v and then adjusting the sound volume with O. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [2 TX/RX]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 AUDIO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [4 VOL MODE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [AUTO BACK]. Remark Default: NORMAL Tip Usually adjust the sound volume by turning O while pressing v. If the [AUTO BACK] is selected, the sound volume adjustment mode will be automatically canceled after you have pressed v to enter the sound volume adjustment mode and return to the frequency display screen. 9 Press p to exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 116 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting memory bank link You can link multiple registered memory banks, and also recall a frequently used memory bank immediately Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 BANK LINK]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a memory bank to link. 7 Press B. The cursor moves to the position (such as BANK1) to set link. 8 Turn O to select [ON]. Remark Default: OFF 9 Press B. 10 Also set link to other memory banks. Set link to each memory bank from memory bank 1 through memory bank 24 by repeating step 6 to 9. The memory bank link is set. 11 Press H. 12 Press p. Exits from the Set mode. Assigning a name to a memory bank A memory bank can be assigned a name with up to 16 characters. For more details, see Assigning Name to Memory Bank on page 49. Assigning a name to a memory channel Memory channels and home channels may be assigned a name (memory tag) such as a callsign or broadcast station name. For more details, see Using Memory Tag on page 46. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 117 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Prohibiting registration to memory channel Memory Channel Protect Function A memory channel may be protected so that a new frequency or memory channel tag name cannot be registered to it. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 MEMORY PROTECT]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [ON]. Any registration to the memory channel is prohibited. 7 Press p to save the memory channel protect, and exit the Remark Default: OFF Set mode. Setting memory skip function Set the scan method for scanning memory channels. For more details, see Specifying a Skip/Selected Memory Channel on page 60. Registering to a memory channel with the lowest memory channel number Memory Channel Write Function When registering to a memory channel. you can display an unregistered memory channel with the lowest memory channel number. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [3 MEMORY]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [6 MEMORY WRITE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [LOWER]. A memory channel with the lowest memory channel number appears on the LCD. Remark Default: NEXT 7 Press p to set the memory channel registration to the lowest unregistered memory channel number, and exit from the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 118 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Notifying a call from a remote station by the bell Notifies you of a call from a remote station by the bell. See Notification of a Call from a Remote Station by the Bell on page 89. Selecting a DCS code Select the DCS code from 104 codes from 023 to 754. For more details, see Setting a DCS Code on page 86. Transmit and receive a DCS Code with a inverted phase DCS INVERSION Function You can transmit and receive a DCS code with an inverted phase when using the digital code squelch function. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 DCS INVERSION]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a phase. When a phase is selected for the reception side, the phase
for transmission side is automatically determined. Reception: [Homeomorphic], [Both Phase],
[Inverted Phase], [Homeomorphic],
[Both Phase], [Inverted Phase]
Transmission: [Homeomorphic], [Inverted Phase],
[Inverted Phase], [Inverted Phase],
[Homeomorphic], [Homeomorphic]
Remark Default: Reception [Homeomorphic], Transmission [Homeomorphic]
7 Press p. The phase of DCS code is set, and exits from the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 119 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the transmission method of the DTMF code Set the transmission method of the registered DTMF code. For more details, see Sending the Registered DTMF Code on page 80. Setting DTMF code The maximum of 16 digit DTMF code can be registered for a telephone number to make a call through the public telephone line from a phone patch. For more details, see Using DTMF Function on page 79. Calling only a specific station New Pager Function When using transceivers with your friends, specifying personal codes allows only a specific station to be called. For more details, see Calling Only a Specific Station New Pager Function on page 90. Enabling no-communication squelch function PR FREQUENCY Function You can set a no-communication squelch frequency in steps of 100 Hz within the range from 300 Hz to 3000 Hz. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [7 PR FREQUENCY]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to tune in to a frequency. Select no-communication squelch frequency in steps of 100 Hz. Remark Default: 1600 Hz and exit the Set mode. 7 Press p to set the no-communication squelch function, F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 120 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Adjusting the squelch level SQL LEVEL Function You can set squelch level to mute the raspy noise heard. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [8 SQL LEVEL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a squelch level. Select from among LEVEL 0 to LEVEL 15. The higher the squelch level, the greater the noise reduction. Remark Default: LEVEL 1 7 Press p to save the selected squelch type, and exit the Set mode.
Setting the signal strength to output sound S Meter Squelch Function You can set A-Band and B-Band individually to output the sound only when receiving a signal stronger than signal strength level set to the S-Meter Level. 1 Select a band as an operating band. 2 Press and hold M for over 1 second to enter the Set mode. 3 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 4 Press H. 5 Turn O to select [9 SQL S-METER]. 6 Press H. 7 Turn O to select a setting value. Select a S-Meter level with reference to the table shown below. Remark Default: OFF Set mode. 8 Press p to save the selected S-Meter level, and exit the F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 121 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Display S-Meter Display No display OFF Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 9 S-Meter is
(By default, S-Meter squelch function is set to OFF.) squelch Operating Status function OFF. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 1. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 2. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 3. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 4. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 5. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 6. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 7. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 8. Outputs the sound of signal stronger than the S-Meter level 9. Setting the squelch type for transmission and reception SQL EXPANTION FUNCTION Squelch types set beforehand can function separately for transmission and reception. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [10 SQL EXPANTION]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [ON]. ON: Use separate squelch for transmission and reception. OFF: Use the same squelch for transmission and reception. 7 Press p to save the separate squelch setting, and exit the Remark Default: OFF Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 122 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the type of tone squelch Set the tone squelch to open the squelch only when a signal containing the specified frequency tone is received. For more details, see Using the Tone Squelch Function on page 84. Selecting a tone frequency Select the tone frequency from 50 types between 67.0 MHz and 254.1 MHz. For more details, see Setting a Tone Frequency on page 85. Setting the sound and speed during tone search Tone Search Function Sound can be muted during tone search. The operation speed of the tone search can also be changed. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [13 TONE-SRCH]. 5 Press H twice. 6 Turn O to select MUTE to [ON].
Remark Default: ON 7 Press M. 8 Turn O to select [SPPED]. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select SPEED to [Rapid]. Remark Default: FAST 11 Press p to save the Tone Search setting and exit the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 123 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode ON/OFF for the Weather Alert Feature Setting the Weather Alert Feature, used for notifying storms and hurricanes, ON or OFF. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [4 SIGNALING]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [14 WX ALERT]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [ON]. ON: Enables the Weather Alert Feature. OFF: Disables the Weather Alert Feature. Remark Default: OFF 7 Press p to save the Weather Alert ON or OFF setting, and exit the Set mode Setting the surveillance interval time for priority channels DW TIME Function When the dual reception function is active, the interval for monitoring the signal of the priority channel can be set. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 DW TIME]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the monitoring interval.
Interval can be selected from 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC. Remark Default: 5 seconds
7 Press p to save the priority memory channel monitoring interval setting and exit the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 124 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
1 2 3 | User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 4.64 MiB |
Set Mode Turning illumination off when scanning stops SCAN LAMP Function You can set the backlight of LCD to turn ON or OFF when a signal is received during scanning. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 SCAN LAMP]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [OFF]. ON: The LCD backlight will light when a signal is received. OFF: The LCD backlight will not light when a signal is received. Remark Default: ON 7 Press p to save the backlight ON or OFF setting when scanning stops, and exit the Set mode. Setting the time to resume scan SCAN RE-START Function You can set the time to resume scanning after a signal is received during scanning. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 SCAN RE-START]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the time to resume scanning. Select from 0.1 SEC to 10 SEC.
Remark Default: 2 seconds 7 Press p to set the resume scanning time, and exit the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 125 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Selecting a reception method when scanning stops Set the reception method for when scanning stops. For more details, see Selecting a Reception Method When Scanning Stops on page P. 59. Setting the range for SCAN You can set the frequency range for scanning with the SCAN Function. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [5 SCAN]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [5 SCAN WIDTH]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [VFO]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select the range for scanning. Specify the scanning range with reference to the next list. 9 Press M. 10 Turn O to select [MEMORY]. 11 Press H. 12 Turn O to select the range for scanning. Mode Display*
Operation Status VFO Mode Memory Mode ALL BAND ALL CH BAND Scans all bands within the range from the current frequency to 108-999 MHz. Scans the current band (see the table on the next page) starting with the current frequency. Scans all memory channels (1-900) of the currently selected memory channel. When selected memory channels are specified, all of them are scanned (See page 59). Scans only the memory channels to which frequencies in the same fre-
quency band*1 are registered. When the selected memory channels are specified, scans only the selected memory channels to which frequencies in the same frequency band*1 are registered (See page 61).
*1 For the relationship between frequency bands and reception frequencies, see the table at the bottom of page 28. 13 Press p to save the range for scanning, and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 126 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Turning off the power automatically APO Function The transceiver may be set to turn off automatically if there is no operation for a certain period of time. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 APO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to set the time. Set the time for the transceiver to turn off automatically in steps of 30 minutes. OFF/30 MIN/1 HOUR to 12 HOURS Remark Default: OFF 7 Press p to save the auto power-off function setting, and exit the Set mode. The transceiver will be automatically turned off if there is no operation for the set period of time. Tips When the auto power-off function is active, the [ icon appears on the LCD. Once the time for automatic power-off is set, it is retained until OFF is selected in step 6 of the above-mentioned procedure. (The next time you turn the transceiver on, if you perform no operation for the set pe-
riod of time, the transceiver will automatically turn itself off.) F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 127 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Preventing accidental transmission Busy Channel Lockout (BCLO) Function You can prevent accidental transmission during signal reception. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [2 BCLO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [ON]. Remark Default: OFF 7 Press p to save the BCLO function setting, and exit the Set mode. Muting the key operation confirmation tone The operation confirmation sound (beep sound) that is heard when keys are operated, or when scanning reaches the end of a frequency band, can be turned off. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 BEEP]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [SELECT]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [OFF]. Remarks Default: KEY&SCAN Display OFF KEY&SCAN KEY Description Mutes the beep. Emits a beep when a key is operated or scan-
ning stops. Emits a beep when a key is pressed. 9 Press M. 10 Turn O to select [EDGE]. 11 Press H. 12 Turn O to select [OFF]. 13 Press p to exit from the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 128 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Turning off the BUSY Indicator When you listen to the radio continuously or when the remaining battery level has become low, you can turn off the BUSY indicator to save battery power consumption. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [4 BUSY LED]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a band. Select a band from among [A BAND], [B BAND], and
[RADIO]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select [OFF]. Remark Default: ON 9 Press p. The BUSY indicator is turned off, and exits from the Set mode. Setting the clock shift for the micro computer Clock Type Function The micro computer Clock Shift function may be set to reduce internal high frequency spurious interference signals. Select [A] for normal use. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [5 CLOCK TYPE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a clock type. A: The Clock Shift function is automatically turned on or off. B: The Clock Shift function is continually active. 7 Press p to save the Clock Type setting, and exit the Set Remark Default: A mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 129 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting interval to save GPS position information Set the interval at which the GPS information of your current position is saved to the microSD memory card. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [6 GPS LOG]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select an interval to save GPS position information. OFF / 1 SEC / 2 SEC / 5 SEC /10 SEC / 30 SEC / 60 SEC Information is not recorded to the microSD memory card if OFF is selected. Remark Default: OFF 7 Press p to save the GPS information saving interval setting, and exit the Set mode. Tips Data saved to the microSD memory card is saved in xxx.LOG format. Saved data can be viewed with PC applications*.
* PC applications are not supported by our company. Permitting Transfer of Home Channel Frequency to VFO You can use the set operation to transfer home channel frequency information to the VFO. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [7 HOME VFO]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select Unlock or Lock. ENABLE: Turning O in home channel transfers the home
channel frequency to VFO. DISABLE: The home channel frequency cannot be transferred. Remark Default: ENABLE 7 Press p to save the frequency transfer ENABLE/DISABLE/
Unlock setting, and exit the Set mode.
F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 130 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Using the White LED as a Flashlight The white LED may be used as a flashlight. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [8 LED LIGT]. 5 Press H. 6 Press M. 7 Press p to exit from the Set mode. The white LED lights as a flashlight. The LED goes out. Setting the conditions for locking LOCK Function Conditions for activating Lock Function, such as keys, O, and p, can be set. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [9 LOCK]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the keys and switches to lock. KEY & DIAL: Locks the keys and O on the front of the transceiver. PTT: Locks p. KEY & PTT: Locks the keys and p on the front of the transceiver. DIAL & PTT: Locks O and p. ALL: Locks the keys, O, and p on the front of the transceiver. KEY: Locks the keys on the front of the transceiver. DIAL: Locks O. Remark Default: KEY&DIAL 7 Press p. The keys and switches to lock are set, and exits from the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 131 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the operation of The function for when T is pressed can be set. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [10 MONI/T-CALL]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the function. MONI: Pressing T monitors frequency. T-CALL: Pressing T functions as tone call. Remark Default: Depends on the transceiver version. 7 Press H. 8 Press p to save the setting and exit the Set mode. The function for T is set. Turning on/off the transceiver at the specified time Timer Function You can turn the transceiver to turn on/off at the set time. Before using this function, adjust the clock. See Setting clock time on page 34. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [11 TIMER]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [ON] or [OFF]. ON: Turns on the transceiver at the specified time. OFF: Turns off the transceiver at the specified time. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to specify hours. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to specify minutes. 11 Press H. 12 Turn O to switch between ON/OFF of the timer. 13 Press M. 14 Press p to exit from the Set mode. The timer function is turned on. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 132 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Password Function You can enter a 4-character password to prevent a third party from using your transceiver without permission. Once a password is entered, the transceiver cannot be turned on until the valid password is entered. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [12 PASSWORD]. 5 Press H. 6 Press H. 7 Turn O to enter the first character of the password. Enter the first character (0-9. A to D, , and #) of the The cursor moves to the next character position. password. 8 Press H. 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to enter the remaining three characters. 10 Press H. 11 Turn O to select [ON]. Remark Default: OFF 12 Press p to save the password setting, and exit the Set mode. Tips To cancel the password function, execute the above-mentioned steps 1 to 5, select OFF with O, and then press p over 1 second. Keypad keys cannot be used to enter the password. When the on-timer function is active, the password function is ineffective. The password entry screen appears. Turning on the transceiver using a password 1 Press and hold P for over 1 second. 2 Enter the password using keypad keys. Enter the registered 4-character password. When the valid password is entered, the frequency display screen appears. Remark When an invalid password is entered, the transceiver is turned off automatically. Caution If youve forget the registered password, carrying out all resetting allows you to turn on the transceiver without entering the password. It should be noted that performing all resetting resets (initializes) all information such as the information registered to memory channels and various setting values. It is recommended that the password be written down on paper. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 133 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Setting the PTT delay time PTT DELAY Function You can set the time for actual transmission to start after p is pressed. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [13 PTT DELAY]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the time. OFF/20ms/50ms/100ms/200ms 7 Press p to save the PTT delay time setting, and exit the Remark Default: OFF Set mode. Setting the ARS function RPT ARS Function You can set the operation of ARS (Tuning in to the repeater frequency automatically enables the repeater). Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [14 RPT ARS]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select ON/OFF. ON: ARS is functional. OFF: ARS is not functional. 7 Press p to save the ARS function ON/OFF setting, and exit Remark Default: ON the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 134 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Setting the direction for repeater shift RPT SHIFT Function You can set the direction of repeater shift. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [15 RPT SHIFT]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the shift direction. SIMPLEX: Does not shift. RPT: Shifts toward lower frequencies.
+RPT: Shifts toward higher frequencies. Remark Default setting differs depending frequency 7 Press p to save the repeater shift direction setting, and exit the Set mode. Setting the range for repeater shift RPT SHIFT FREQ Function You can set the repeater shift range. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [16 RPT SHIFT FREQ]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select shift range. The range can be set in steps of 50 kHz between 0.0000 MHz and 150.000 MHz. Pressing F and then turning O allows you to set frequencies in steps of 1 MHz. Remark Default setting differs depending frequency 7 Press p to save the repeater shift range setting, and exit the Set mode. Set Mode F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 135 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Disabling reception while no signal is received Reception Save Function To reduce power consumption, the reception function can be turned off when not receiving a signal. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [17 SAVE RX]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the time. Select the time for the reception to be turned off automatically.
(Step: 0.1 sec)
(Step: 0.5 sec) step 5 sec OFF 0.2 SEC (1:1) to 1.0 SEC (1:5) to 1.0 SEC (1:5) to 10 SEC (1:50) to 1.0 sec (1:50) to 60 sec (1:300 sec)
Remark Default: 0.2 sec (1:1) 7 Press p to save the Reception Save function setting, and exit the Set mode. Changing the frequency step manually Frequency step can be set so that it can be changed manually. For more details, see Changing the Frequency Step Manually on page 37. Setting clock time Set the time for the internal clock of this transceiver. For details, see Setting clock time on page 34. Restricting the continuous transmission time TOT Function Set the transceiver to automatically return to the receive mode after transmitting continuously for a certain period of time. Accidental transmission of unnecessary signals, and unwanted battery power consumption can be prevented (time-out timer function). Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 136 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 4 Turn O to select [20 TOT]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select the time. Set the time for the transceiver to automatically return to the reception state in steps of 30 seconds. OFF/30 SEC to 10 MIN Remark Default: OFF 7 Press p to save the TOT function setting, and exit the Set mode. Tips When the time-out timer function is active, a beep is emitted when it comes near the set time. About 10 seconds later, the transceiver returns to the reception state. Once the time is set, it is retained until OFF is selected in step 6 of the above-mentioned procedure. Setting the frequency selection range for operation in the VFO mode VFO MODE Function You can set the frequency selection range for operating in the VFO mode. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [8 CONFIG]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [21 VFO MODE]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select a frequency range. ALL: Switches to the next band when the end of a band is reached. BAND: Moves to the other end of the band when the end of that band is reached. 7 Press p to save the frequency selection range setting, and Remark Default: BAND exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 137 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Notification of a call from a remote station by vibration The vibrator function may be set to notify you of a call from a remote station. For details, see Notification of Call from the Remote Station by Vibration of the Vibrator on page 88. Saving/ Loading data to/from microSD memory card Settings information can be saved to a microSD memory card, also the saved information can be loaded to the transceiver. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [10 SD CARD]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 BACKUP]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [Write to SD] or [Read from SD]. Write to SD: Saves the setting information of your transceiver to the microSD memory card. Read from SD: Loads the setting to your transceiver from the microSD memory card. information Cancel: Stops save or load. 7 Press H. 8 Press H.
[OK?] appears on the LCD. The write or read is performed and [Completed] appears when finished. 9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d Blinks when writing Saving/ Loading memory channel information to/from microSD memory card Memory channel setting information can be saved to a microSD memory card, or saved information can be loaded to this transceiver. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [10 SD CARD]. 3 Press H. 138 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 4 Turn O to select [2 MEMORY CH]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [Write to SD] or [Read from SD]. Write to SD: A beep is heard and [Completed] appears when writing to SD finished. Read from SD: A beep is heard when loading from SD finished and the transceiver restarts with the settings read from the microSD memory card. (The operation in step 9 is not required.) Cancel: Stops save or load. 7 Press H. 8 Press H.
[OK?] appears on the LCD. Set Mode Blinks when writing The write or read is performed and [Completed] appears when finished. 9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. Saving/ Loading GROUP ID information to/from microSD memory card Group ID setting information can be saved to a microSD memory card, or saved informa-
tion can be loaded to this transceiver. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [10 SD CARD]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [3 GROUP ID]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [Write to SD] or [Read from SD]. Write to SD: Saves the Group ID information to your transceiver to the microSD memory card. Read from SD: Loads the Group ID information to your transceiver from the microSD memory card. Cancel: Stops save or load. 7 Press H.
[OK?] appears on the LCD. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d Blinks when writing 139 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode 8 Press H. Write to SD: A beep is heard and [Completed] appears when writing to SD finished. Read from SD: A beep is heard when loading from SD finished and the transceiver restarts with the settings read from the microSD memory card. (The operation in step 9 is not required.) 9 Press p to exit from the Set mode. Formatting a microSD memory card Format a new microSD. For more details, see Formatting a microSD memory card on page 24. Blinks when writing Setting the optional microphone with camera for use Image size and quality can be set for the optional microphone with camera (MH-85A11U). Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [11 OPTION]. 3 Press H. 4 Turn O to select [1 USB CAMERA]. 5 Press H. 6 Turn O to select [SIZE]. 7 Press H. 8 Turn O to select an image size. 9 Press H. 10 Turn O to select [QUALITY]. 11 Press H. 12 Turn O to select an image quality. NORMAL: Intermediate image quality HIGH: High image quality 13 Press p to exit from the Set mode. Caution LOW: Low image quality 320240 160120 If image size is set to large or image quality is set to high, the data transmission time becomes longer. The transmission time varies depending on the content of an image. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 140 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Registering CALLSIGN The CALLSIGN used in the digital mode can be registered with up to 10 alphanumeric characters. Enter the Set mode:
1 Press and hold M for over 1 second. 2 Turn O to select [12 CALLSIGN]. 3 Press H. 4 Enter the characters using keypad keys. Enter a callsign using keypad keys with reference to the following table. Numeric key A, 0 (Alphanumeric) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 ABC2 DEF3 GHI4 JKL5 MNO6 PQRS7 TUV8 WXYZ9 0 Tip Pressing H moves the cursor to the right. Press the % to move the corsor back to the left. Press the F to delete the letter or number at the current cursor position. The cursor moves. 5 Press H. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the CALLSIGN. 7 Press p to save the CALLSIGN setting and exit the Set mode. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 141 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Using the transceiver for packet communication You can perform packet communication with your transceiver by connecting TNC
(Terminal Node Controller) using an optional connection cable (CT-44). EAR MIC TNC SP GND MIC PTT GND 10 F 2 k After TNC is connected, set the level of output to TNC by adjusting the sound volume level of your transceiver. Also adjust the level of input to your transceiver using the output level adjustment volume on the TNC (Input level cannot be adjusted on your transceiver) Caution When sending a vast volume of data, the transmission takes a longer time and the transceiver may be overheated. If the transmission is continued for a long time, the overheat prevention circuit will operate and the transmission power decreases. If the transmission is continued further, the transmission will be au-
tomatically stopped to prevent the transceiver from overheating and consequently malfunctioning. The transceiver will return to the receive mode. When the transceiver returns to the receive mode after the overheat prevention circuit has operated, turn the transceiver off, or keep it in the receive mode until the temperature cools. Tips Set the Receive Battery Save function to OFF during packet communication by selecting
[8 CONFIG] [17 SAVE RX] in the Set mode. The reception can be interfered with a noise generated from PC. If the transceiver can not receive normally, disconnect it from the PC and reconnect it to the PC using a photocoupler or noise filter. To connect the TNC and PC, refer to the TNC instruction manual. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 142 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Clone Operation Data and various settings saved in your transceiver can be copied to another FT1XDR/
DE transceiver. Set Mode 1 Turn off the power of both FT1XDR/DE transceivers and connect an optional clone cable (CT-168) to the DATA terminal of each transceiver. 2 Press P while pressing F on each transceiver. The two transceivers are turned on and placed in the clone mode. 3 Press % on the receiving side transceiver and B on the transmission side. Copying data starts. When copying starts, the display on the receiving transceiver changes from
[--WAIT--] to [--RX--]. When data transmission begins from the sending transceiver, the data transmission indicator appears on the LCD, indicating the data transfer is in progress. The indicator appears on the receiving transceiver, as well when data reception starts. Tips When copying is completed, the reception side transceiver returns to the normal mode. The indication on the LCD of the transmission side transceiver returns from [--TX--] to [CLONE]. 4 Turn off the power of both transceivers and disconnect the clone cable. Caution When the [ERROR] appears on the LCD during data transfer, copying cannot be completed. Check the clone cable connection, and redo the clone operation from the beginning. Time data cannot be copied. 143 F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Set Mode Connecting an external device Using the DATA terminal, the transceiver can support various functions by setting GPS, the internal GPS unit begins outputting the position information data. The position information of the transceiver can be transferred at approximately 1 second intervals to the computer so that the position of the transceiver can be displayed in real-time on programs such as map software. Tips For properties such as communication speed and Input/Output between COM ports. For more details, see the Set mode option, [9 APRS] [17 COM PORT SETTING]. Connecting to a PC Connecting a PC to the data terminal of the FT1XDR/DE using the PC Connection Cable
(SCU-19) accessory will enable data transmission or updating firmware as described below. a. Transmit position location information received by the FT1XDR/DE internal GPS unit. By setting [OUTPUT] in [17 COM PORT SETTING] of Set mode option [9 APRS] to details on settings, see Set mode option [17 COM PORT SETTING] in the APRS Instruction Manual. To show information, software operating with NMEA-0183 specified GGA and RMC sentence is required. b. FT1XDR/DE Firmware Updates When a new firmware update for the FT1XDR/DE is available, go to the YAESU homepage to download the programming data and update the FT1XDR/DE to its newest state. F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d SCU-19
(accessory) Tip To use the SCU-19, install a dedicated driver to the PC. For downloading the dedicated driver and installation manual, please go to the YAESU website homepage (http://www.yaesu.com). 144 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Connecting the FT1XDR/DE to external devices Position information data can be exchanged between commercially sold GPS receivers or other external devices by using the optional Data Cable (CT-170) or the Data Cable 2.5 (CT-176). Set Mode CT-170 (option) Tip Connect the Data Cable (CT-170) and the Data Output Cable (CT-176) by referring to the instruction manual for the GPS device to be used, and cable specifications on the next page. Data Cable (CT-170) RXD (Serial data input [FT1XDR/DE External RXD (Serial data input [FT1XDR/DE External TXD (Serial data output [FT1XDR/DE External TXD (Serial data output [FT1XDR/DE External Equipment]) Equipment]) GND Equipment]) Equipment]) GND Data Cable (2.5) (CT-176) RXD (Serial data input [FT1XDR/DE External TXD (Serial data output [FT1XDR/DE External TXD (Serial data output [FT1XDR/DE External RXD (Serial data input [FT1XDR/DE External Equipment]) Equipment]) GND Equipment]) Equipment]) GND F u n c t i o n s U s e d A s N e e d e d 145 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Appendix Optional Parts Speaker / Microphone (MH-34B4B) Earpiece Microphone (MH-37A4B) VOX Headset (SSM-63A) Microphone Adapter (CT-44) DC Cable w/ Noise Filter (SDD-13)
(USA/EXP market only) DC Cable (E-DC-6) (USA/EXP market only) BNC-to-SMA Adapter (CN-3) Soft Case (CSC-97) 3x AA Cell Battery Case (FBA-39) Lithium Ion Battery Packs (FNB-101LI, 7.4 V, 1100 mAh)
(SBR-14LI, 7.2 V, 2200 mAh) Lithium Ion Battery Packs Rapid Charger (CD-41) Battery Charger (PA-48B/C/U*) Battery Charger (SAD-11B; for USA market) Speaker Microphone with Snapshot camera
(MH-85A11U) Clone Cable (CT-168) Data Cable (CT-170) PC Connection Cable (SCU-19) Data Cable (2.5) (CT-176) Belt Clip (SBH-13)
* B suffix is for use with 120 VAC (Type-A plug), C suffix is for use with 230-240 VAC (Type-C plug), and U suffix is for use with 230 VAC (Type-BF plug). Availability of accessories may vary. Some accessories are supplied as standard per local requirements, while others may be unavailable in some regions. Consult your Yaesu Dealer for details regarding these and any newly-available options. Connection of any non-Yaesu approved accessory, should it cause dam-
age, may void the Limited Warranty on this apparatus. 146 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 If you suspect malfunction Check the following items before requesting for repair. The transceiver does not turn on. Is the battery is depleted?
Charge the battery pack after purchase, and when the transceiver has not been used for a long time. Is the battery pack properly set?
Refer to Mounting the battery pack and securely mount the battery pack. Is the external power supply properly connected?
When using a external power supply, connect an external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug (SDD-13) or an external power cable (E-DC-6) to this jack. Is the voltage of the battery pack or the SDD-13 correct?
Be sure that there is a charge left in the battery pack (do not completely discharge). Check that the output voltage of the SDD-13 is approximately 12V. There is no sound Is the level of squelch (or S meter squelch) set too high?
Press the Monitor Switch and check that you can hear white noise. Adjust the level of squelch (or S meter squelch) when receiving a weak signal. Is the volume low?
Turn O clockwise while pressing v to increase the sound volume. Is the tone squelch or DCS on?
When the tone squelch or DCS is on, the sound is not output until the transceiver receives a signal containing the same tone frequency or DCS code set. There is no transmission of radio waves. Are you pressing the p switch properly?
Is the PTT lock on?
Is the Busy TX Block (BCLO function) on?
When the Busy TX Block (BCLO Function) is on, transmission cannot be done when receiving a signal even if p is pressed. Wait until signal being received stops and then press p. Is the transmission frequency on an ham radio band?
Transmission cannot be performed on the AM Radio Broadcast Band/ Short Wave Radio Band/ FM Radio Broadcast Band/ Air Band/ Information Radio Band. Is the voltage of the battery pack or external power source correct?
Check the remaining charge on the battery pack. In addition, using a power supply where voltage drops during transmission will prevent the FT1XDR/DE from operating on full capability. The keys or O does not respond. Is the Key Lock or DIAL Lock on?
147 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 If you suspect malfunction The battery pack cannot be charged or battery power depletes immediately after charging. Is the battery pack being charged with a charger specified by Yaesu?
Charge the battery pack using the accessory battery charger (PA-48B or SAD-11B) or the rapid charge cradle (CD-41). When using a external power supply, use the external power supply adapter with a cigarette lighter plug
(SDD-13) or an external power cable (E-DC-6). Is the battery pack in use exhausted?
If the Charging Error appears on the LCD when charging, there is a chance the battery pack is over discharged. If the error is repetitively displayed after charging the battery pack several times, the battery pack may have reached its service life or defective. Battery packs are consumables. Please replace the battery pack with a new one immediately. Battery packs can be charged and reused up to approximately 300 times. Depending on the combination for simultaneous reception, there may be internal beats from high frequen-
cies caused by the internal oscillator. This is not a malfunction. (See the calculation formula below: n is for the arbitrary integer). Depending on the combination for simultaneous reception, there may be fluctuations in reception sensitivity. Reception Frequency = 16 MHz n multiplicative Reception Frequency = 15.6 MHz n multiplicative Reception Frequency = 4.9152 MHz n multiplicative Reception Frequency = 15.6 MHz n multiplicative Reception Frequency = 18.432 MHz n multiplicative Upper Side (A-Band) Frequency = (Lower Side (B-band) Frequency 46.35 MHz) n multiplicative Upper Side (A-Band) Frequency = (Lower Side (B-band) Frequency 47.25 MHz) n multiplicative @
Upper Side (A-band) Mode = NFM 148 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Index Symbol A key ................................................................................12 B key ................................................................................12 D key ...................................................................................12 F key ....................................................................................12 H key ...................................................................................12 p switch .................................................................................12 P switch ..............................................................................12 T key ...................................................................................12 A Activating the GPS function .....................................................68 Adjusting the LCD backlight and keypad key light brightness level ...107 Adjusting the LCD contrast level ...........................................106 Adjusting the microphone sensitivity .....................................115 Adjusting the squelch level ..............................................37, 121 Adjusting the volume level .......................................................26 AF-DUAL function ....................................................................77 All reset....................................................................................39 AMS .........................................................................................32 AMS transmission mode........................................................112 Analog FM mode .....................................................................32 Antenna .....................................................................................6 Antenna terminal .....................................................................12 APO function .........................................................................127 APRS function .........................................................................67
*web Assigning a name to a memory channel .................................47 Assigning name to memory bank ............................................49 ATT function ..........................................................................109 Attaching a hand strap.............................................................16 Attaching the belt clip ..............................................................15 Attaching the protective cap ....................................................15 Attenuator function ................................................................109 B BACK TRACK function screen ................................................74 Backtrack function ...................................................................74 Band scope function ................................................................82 Battery approximate operating time.........................................19 Battery case (FBA-39) .............................................................16 Battery Case 3x AA Cell (FBA-39) ......................................146 Battery charger (PA-48B/C/U*) ..............................................146 Battery charger (SAD-11B; for USA market) .........................146 BCLO function .......................................................................128 Before transmitting radio waves ..............................................11 Being called by the remote station (standby operation) ..........93 Bell...........................................................................................89 Belt clip ......................................................................................6 BNC-to-SMA adapter (CN-3) .................................................146 Bundled items ............................................................................6 Busy Channel Lockout function .............................................128 BUSY/TX lamp ........................................................................12 C Calling a specific station ..........................................................92 Calling only a specific station (new pager function).................90 Callsign ....................................................................................25 Canceling memory channel registration in memory bank........49 Canceling scanning .................................................................57 Changing home channel frequency .........................................45 Changing the display pattern of the PO meter ......................109 Changing the frequency step manually ...................................37 Changing the lighting condition .............................................105 Changing the mode manually ..................................................38 Changing the number of times the bell rings ...........................89 Changing the opening message displayed immediately after power-on ...107 Changing the sound volume setting method .........................116 Changing the transmission power level ...................................36 Charging the battery pack .......................................................17 Clock Type function ...............................................................129 Clone cable (CT-168) ............................................................146 Clone operation .....................................................................143 Communicating via the repeater..............................................40 Communicating with a apecific remote station ........................84 Communication mode..............................................................32 Confirming the entered DTMF code by the sound...................80 Connecting the FT1XDR/DE to external devices ..................145 D Data Cable (2.5) (CT-176) ..................................................146 Data cable (CT-170) ..............................................................146 Data FR mode .........................................................................32 DATA terminal ..........................................................................12 DC cable (E-DC-6) ................................................................146 DC cable w/ noise filter (SDD-13)..........................................146 DCS .........................................................................................84 DCS code ................................................................................86 DCS INVERSION function.....................................................119 Deleting a frequency registered to the skip search memory channel ...58 Deleting memory channel ........................................................46 Digital communication .............................................................32 Digital mode.............................................................................32 Disabling reception while no signal is received .....................136 Dismounting microSD memory card ........................................23 Displaying memory tag ............................................................47 Displaying the GPS screen....................................................103 Displaying the version of the DSP program ...........................115 DTMF function .........................................................................79 Dual reception function ............................................................75 DW ...........................................................................................75 DW TIME function .................................................................124 E Earpiece microphone (MH-37A4B)........................................146 Enabling no-communication squelch function .......................120 Enter the Set mode..................................................................94 EXT DC IN jack .......................................................................12 External power supply .............................................................21 External power supply for use in vehicle .................................20 F Flashlight (white LED) .............................................................12 Flow of operation to use the pager function ............................90 FM mode .................................................................................32 Formatting a microSD memory card........................................24 Frequencies of international VHF (marine) radio.....................53 Frequency band for the A-band ...............................................29 Frequency band for the B-band ...............................................29 FT1XDR/DE ...............................................................................6 FT1XDR/DE Firmware Updates ............................................144
*web: Please download the instruction manuals for GM function and APRS from our home page. 149 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Index G P GM function .............................................................................65
*web GPS .........................................................................................68 Group monitor function ............................................................65
*web H Home channel .........................................................................45 Home channel dual reception ..................................................76 HOME VFO ...........................................................................130 I Input a callsign.........................................................................25 Installing the antenna ..............................................................15 Installing the battery pack ........................................................17 International VHF (marine) radio .............................................52 IPX5 .........................................................................................11 L Listen to the international VHF (marine) radio .........................52 Listening radio broadcast with AF-DUAL reception function ...77 Lithium ion battery packs (FNB-101LI, 7.4 V, 1100 mAh) ......146 Lithium ion battery packs (SBR-14LI, 7.2 V, 2200 mAh) .......146 LOCK function .......................................................................131 Locking keys ............................................................................39 Locking switches .....................................................................39 M Measuring the battery voltage and the transceiver temperature ...........................................................................108 Memory bank link scan ............................................................62 Memory channel dual reception ..............................................76 Memory channel protect function ..........................................118 Memory channel scanning.......................................................59 Memory channel write function ..............................................118 Memory functions ....................................................................42 Memory tag..............................................................................46 Method of positioning by GPS .................................................70 Microphone adapter (CT-44) .................................................146 Microphone gain ....................................................................115 microSD memory card .............................................................22 Mounting microSD memory card .............................................22 Mute.........................................................................................35 Muting audio ............................................................................35 Muting the key operation confirmation tone...........................128 N New pager function..................................................................90 Notification of a call from a remote station by the bell .............89 Notification of call from the remote station by vibration of the vibrator ....88 O Operating band ........................................................................27 Optional parts ........................................................................146 Packet communication ..........................................................142 Password function .................................................................133 PC connection cable (SCU-19) .........................................6, 146 Performing communication ................................................25, 31 Performing programmable memory channel scan...................64 Permitting transfer of home channel frequency to VFO ........130 PMS .........................................................................................63 PMS memory channel .............................................................63 Positioning by GPS..................................................................70 Power cable .............................................................................20 Power supply voltage measurement function ........................108 PR FREQUENCY function ....................................................120 Preset receiver memory channel .............................................51 Preventing accidental transmission .......................................128 Priority memory channel ..........................................................75 Programmable memory channel .............................................63 Programmable memory channel scan .....................................63 Prohibiting registration to memory channel ...........................118 Protective plate for battery pack ................................................6 PTT DELAY function ..............................................................134 R Rapid charger (CD-41) ..........................................................146 Real-time navigation function ..................................................73 Recalling a memory channel ...................................................44 Recalling home channel ..........................................................45 Recalling memory bank ...........................................................49 Reception frequencies .............................................................28 Reception mode (radio wave type) ..........................................38 Reception Save function........................................................136 Reducing receiver sensitivity .................................................109 Register to a memory channel.................................................43 Registering a memory channel in a memory bank ..................48 Registering CALLSIGN..........................................................141 Registering to a memory channel with the lowest memory channel number....118 Registering to a programmable memory channel....................63 Registering your current position .............................................74 Registering your favorite preset receiver memory channels in memory bank.....51 Removing the battery pack ......................................................17 Repeater operation ..................................................................40 Resetting the Set mode options ..............................................94 Restoring deleted memory channel .........................................46 Restoring to defaults................................................................39 Restricting the continuous transmission time ........................136 RPT ARS function ..................................................................134 RPT SHIFT FREQ function ...................................................135 RPT SHIFT function ..............................................................135 S S meter squelch function .......................................................121 Safety precautions .....................................................................7 Saving/ Loading data to/from microSD memory card ............138 Saving/ Loading GROUP ID information to/from microSD memory card .......139 Saving/ Loading memory channel information to/from microSD memory card .......138 SCAN LAMP function ............................................................125 SCAN RE-START function ....................................................125 Scanning a memory bank ........................................................61 Scanning function ....................................................................56 Scanning only the selected memory channel ..........................61 150
*web: Please download the instruction manuals for GM function and APRS from our home page. AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Index Squelch level ...........................................................................37 STANDBY BEEP setting ........................................................114 Switching between AM antennas.............................................33 Switching between digital and analog mode ......................... 111 T Taking picture ..........................................................................82 Taking picture with the optional camera mounted on speaker microphone .........82 Temperature measurement function ......................................108 Time signal tone ......................................................................34 Timer function ........................................................................132 Tone Calling (1750 Hz) ............................................................40 Tone Search function .............................................................123 Tone squelch ...........................................................................84 TOT function ..........................................................................136 Transmission power level ........................................................36 Transmit and receive a DCS code with a inverted phase ......119 Transmitting GPS data ..........................................................144 Tuning in to a frequency ..........................................................30 Turning illumination off when scanning stops ........................125 Turning off the BUSY indicator ..............................................129 Turning off the power automatically .......................................127 Turning on the transceiver .......................................................25 Turning on/off the transceiver at the specified time ...............132 U Usable microSD memory card.................................................22 Using memory bank.................................................................48 Using the memory ...................................................................42 Using the scanning function ....................................................56 Using the white LED as a flashlight .......................................131 V V/D mode.................................................................................32 VFO dual reception..................................................................75 VFO MODE function ..............................................................137 VFO scan.................................................................................56 Vibrator ....................................................................................88 Vibrator operation mode ..........................................................88 Voice FR mode ........................................................................32 VOX headset (SSM-63A) ......................................................146 Worldwide short wave broadcast .............................................54 W Searching for signals with the signal strength graph ...............82 Searching for the frequency of the DCS used by the remote station .....87 Searching for the frequency of the tone squelch used by the remote station ......86 Select a tone squelch type ......................................................84 Selected memory channel .......................................................60 Selecting a band ......................................................................29 Selecting a DCS code .............................................................86 Selecting a display language .................................................106 Selecting a frequency band .....................................................29 Selecting a reception method when scanning stops ...............59 Selecting a tone frequency ......................................................85 Selecting an operating band ....................................................27 Selecting communication mode...............................................32 Selecting vibrator operation mode ...........................................88 Sending a DTMF code manually .............................................81 Sending the registered DTMF code.........................................80 Set mode .................................................................................94 Set mode option list .................................................................95 Setting clock time ....................................................................34 Setting interval to save GPS position information .................130 Setting memory bank link ......................................................117 Setting the ARS function........................................................134 Setting the clock shift for the micro computer........................129 Setting the code of your station ...............................................91 Setting the conditions for locking ...........................................131 Setting the direction for repeater shift....................................135 Setting the display method for BACKTRACK ........................104 Setting the display method of the remote station information .............................................................................104 Setting the DTMF code............................................................79 Setting the frequency selection range for operation in the VFO mode ....137 Setting the operation of T .................................................132 Setting the operation of Monitor key ......................................132 Setting the optional microphone with camera for use............140 Setting the pop up time of the remote station information .....112 Setting the PTT delay time ....................................................134 Setting the range for repeater shift ........................................135 Setting the range for SCAN ...................................................126 Setting the resumption time of radio reception ........................78 Setting the search channels for the BAND SCOPE function ..................................................................................105 Setting the signal strength to output sound ...........................121 Setting the sound and speed during tone search ..................123 Setting the squelch type for the digital mode.........................112 Setting the squelch type for transmission and reception .......122 Setting the surveillance interval time for priority channels.....124 Setting the time signal .............................................................34 Setting the time to resume scan ............................................124 Setting the transmission modulation level .............................110 Simultaneous radio broadcast reception .................................77 Simultaneous signal reception over the other frequency while listening to the radio .......................................................77 Skip memory channel ..............................................................60 Skip search memory ................................................................57 Smart navigation function ........................................................73 Soft case (CSC-97) ...............................................................146 Speaker / microphone (MH-34B4B) ......................................146 Speaker Microphone with Snapshot camera (MH-85A11U) .......82, 146 Specifying a selected memory channel ...................................60 Specifying a skip memory channel ..........................................60 Specifying the frequency you do not want to scan ..................58 Split memory............................................................................44 SQL EXPANTION function ....................................................122 SQL LEVEL function ..............................................................121 151 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Specifications General Frequency Range A (Main) Band RX:
B (Sub) Band RX:
TX:
Channel Steps:
Frequency Stability:
Emission Type:
Supply Voltage:
Operating:
Current Consumption:
Operating Temperature:
Case Size (W H D):
Weight (Approx.):
152 0.5 ~ 1.8 MHz (AM Radio) 1.8 ~ 30 MHz (SW Radio) 30 ~ 76 MHz (50 MHz HAM: USA version) 30 ~ 88 MHz (50 MHz HAM: EXP/EU version) 76 ~ 108 MHz (FM Radio: USA version) 88 ~ 108 MHz (FM Radio: EXP/EU version) 108 ~ 137 MHz (Air Band) 137 ~ 174 MHz (144 MHz HAM) 174 ~ 222 MHz (VHF Band) 222 ~ 420 MHz (GEN1) 420 ~ 470 MHz (430 MHz HAM) 470 ~ 774 MHz (UHF Band: USA version) 470 ~ 800 MHz (UHF Band: EXP/EU version) 803 ~ 999 MHz (GEN2, Cellular Blocked: USA version) 800 ~ 999 MHz (GEN2: EXP/EU version) 108 ~ 137 MHz (Air Band) 137 ~ 174 MHz (144 MHz HAM) 174 ~ 222 MHz (VHF Band) 222 ~ 420 MHz (GEN1) 420 ~ 470 MHz (430 MHz HAM) 470 ~ 580 MHz (UHF Band) 144 ~ 146 MHz or 144 ~ 148 MHz 430 ~ 440 MHz or 430 ~ 450 MHz 5/6.25/8.33/9/10/12.5/15/20/25/50/100 kHz 2.5 ppm (20 C to +60 C [4 F to +140 F]) F1D, F2D, F3E, F7W Nominal: 7.4 V DC (Negative Ground) 4 14 V (Negative Ground, EXT DC JACK) 11 16 V (Negative Ground, EXT DC JACK with SDD-13) 7.4 V DC (Negative Ground) 150 mA (Mono band Receive) 220 mA (Dual band Receive) 100 mA (Mono band Receive, Standby) 150 mA (Dual band Receive, Standby) 45 mA (Mono band Receive, Standby, Saver On Save Ratio 1:5) 45 mA (Dual band Receive, Standby, Saver On Save Ratio 1:5)
+30 mA (GPS On)
+65 mA (Digital) 600 A (Auto Power Off) 1.7 A (5 W TX, 144 MHz 7.4 V DC) 2.0 A (5 W TX, 430 MHz 7.4 V DC) 20 C to +60 C [4 F to +140 F]
60 95 32.5 mm (2.4 3.7 1.28) w/o knob & antenna 290 g (10.23 oz) with SBR-14LI & Antenna AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 Specifications Transmitter RF Power Output:
Modulation Type:
Spurious Emission:
Receiver Circuit Type:
5 W (@ 7.4 V or EXT DC) F1D, F2D, F3E: Variable Reactance modulation F7W: 4 FSK (C4FM) At least 60 dB below (@TX Power Hi, L3, L2) At least 50 dB below (@TX Power L1) AM, NFM: Double-Conversion Super heterodyne AM/FM Radio: Single-Conversion Super heterodyne Sensitivity:
Intermediate Frequencies: 1st: 47.25MHz (AM, NFM A Band) 1st: 46.35MHz (AM, NFM B Band) 2nd: 450 kHz (AM, NFM) 1st: 130 kHz (AM/FM Radio) 3 V for 10 dB SN (0.5 ~ 30 MHz, AM) 0.35 V TYP for 12 dB SINAD (30 ~ 54 MHz, NFM) 1 V TYP for 12 dB SINAD (54 ~ 76 (88) MHz, NFM) 1.5 V TYP for 12 dB SINAD (76 (88) ~ 108 MHz, WFM) 1.5 V TYP for 10 dB SN (108 ~ 137 MHz, AM) 0.2 V for 12 dB SINAD (137 ~ 140 MHz, NFM) 0.16 V for 12 dB SINAD (140 ~ 150 MHz, NFM) 0.2 V for 12 dB SINAD (150 ~ 174 MHz, NFM) 1 V for 12 dB SINAD (174 ~ 222 MHz, NFM) 0.5 V for 12 dB SINAD (300 ~ 350 MHz, NFM) 0.2 V for 12 dB SINAD (350 ~ 400 MHz, NFM) 0.16 V for 12 dB SINAD (400 ~ 470 MHz, NFM) 1.5 V for 12 dB SINAD (470 ~ 540 MHz, NFM) 3 V TYP for 12 dB SINAD (540 ~ 800 MHz, NFM) 1.5 V TYP for 12 dB SINAD (800 ~ 999 MHz, NFM, Cellular Blocked) 0.19 V TYP for BER 1% (Digital Mode) NFM, AM 12 kHz / 35 kHz (6 dB / 60 dB) 200 mW (8 for 10 % THD 7.4 V) 400 mW (8 for 10 % THD 13.8 V) Selectivity:
AF Output:
Specifications are subject to change without notice, and are guaranteed within the 144/222 (USA ver-
sion)/430 MHz amateur bands only. 153 AppendixApplication for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. 2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference including received, interference that may cause undesired operation. 3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. Part 15.21: Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the users authorization to operate this device. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER The Scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner receiver by any user. WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW. Attention in case of use This transceiver works on frequencies which are not generally permitted. As for the actual usage, the user has to possess an amateur radio licence. Usage is allowed only in the frequency bands which are allocated for amateur radios. List of national codes CZ BE DE FR GB ES LT IT PT PL IS CH BG CY AT DK EE FI IE GR HR HU NL LV MT LU SE SI RO SK LI NO Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment Products with the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste. Electronic and Electric Equipment should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items and their waste by products. In EU countries, please contact your local equipment supplier representative or service center for information about the waste collection system in your coun-
try. 154 Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Tennozu Parkside Building 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan YAESU USA 6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A. YAESU UK Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K. Copyright 2015 YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. Printed in Japan 1505X-FO Application for FCC / IC FCC ID: K6620445X20 IC: 511B-20445X20
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-09-29 | 800 ~ 999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2013-05-17 | 800 ~ 999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | |
3 | 2012-07-27 | 800 ~ 999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2015-09-29
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2013-05-17
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
2012-07-27
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Yaesu Musen Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0013655220
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
Tennozu Parkside Building 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Tennozu Parkside Building
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Tokyo, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
||||
1 2 3 |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
K66
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
20445X20
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
K******** T****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Engineering Division/Quality Assurance Leader
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
81-3-********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
81-3-********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
k******@yaesu.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | No | |||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | No | |||||
1 2 3 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 12/28/2015 | ||||
1 2 3 | 09/10/2012 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | CSR - Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | AMATEUR RADIO WITH SCANNING RECEIVER | ||||
1 2 3 | Amateur Radio With Scanning Receiver | |||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | 9/29/2015 - Class II Permissive Change: Changing the GPS Module in the radio. | ||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
SGS RF Technologies Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Timco Engineering, Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
K****** Y********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
B****** C****
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
81-45********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
352-4********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
81-45********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
352 4********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
k******@sgs.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
b******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 0.5 | 1.8 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15B | 30 | 76 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15B | 76 | 137 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 15B | 137 | 174 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 15B | 174 | 222 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 15B | 222 | 420 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 15B | 420 | 470 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 15B | 470 | 800 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 15B | 800 | 999 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | 0.5 | 1.8 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15B | 30 | 76 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15B | 76 | 137 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15B | 137 | 174 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 15B | 174 | 222 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 15B | 222 | 420 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 15B | 420 | 470 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 15B | 470 | 800 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 15B | 800 | 999 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15B | 0.5 | 1.8 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15B | 30 | 76 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 15B | 76 | 137 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 15B | 137 | 174 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 15B | 174 | 222 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 15B | 222 | 420 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 7 | 15B | 420 | 470 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 8 | 15B | 470 | 800 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 9 | 15B | 800 | 999 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC